2010中考英语完形填空100篇

2010中考英语完形填空100篇

‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇 ‎（1）‎ Different things usually stand for different feelings. Red, for example, is the color of fire, heat, blood and life. People say red is an exciting and active color. They associate（使发生联系） red with a strong feeling like 1 . Red is used for signs of 2 , such as STOP signs and fire engines. Orange is the bright, warm color of 3 in autumn. People say orange is a 4 color. They associate orange with happiness. Yellow is the color of __5__. People say it is a cheerful color. They associate yellow too, with happiness. Green is the cool color of grass in __6__. People say it is a refreshing color. In general, people __7__ two groups of colors: warm colors and cool colors. The warm colors are red, orange and __8__. Where there are warm color and a lot of light, people usually want to be __9__. Those who like to be with __10 _ like red. The cool colors are __11_ and blue. Where are these colors, people are usually worried. Some scientists say that time seems to __12 _ more slowly in a room with warm colors. They suggest that a warm color is a good __13_ for a living room or a __14_ . People who are having a rest or are eating do not want time to pass quickly. __15 colors are better for some offices if the people working there want time to pass quickly.‎ ‎　　1. A. sadness B. anger C. administration D. smile ‎　　2. A. roads B. ways C. danger D. places ‎　　3. A. land B. leaves C. grass D. mountains ‎　　4. A. lively B. dark C. noisy D. frightening ‎　　5. A. moonlight B. light C. sunlight D. stars ‎　　6. A. summer B. spring C. autumn D. winter ‎　　7. A. speak B. say C. talk about D. tell ‎　　8. A. green B. yellow C. white D. gray ‎　　9. A. calm B. sleepy C. active D. helpful ‎　　10. A. the other B. another C. other one D. others ‎　　11. A. black B. green C. golden D. yellow ‎　　12. A. go round B. go by C. go off D. go along ‎　　13. A. one B. way C. fact D. matter ‎　　14. A. factory B. classroom C. restaurant D. hospital ‎　　15. A. Different B. Cool C. Warm D. All ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　不同颜色往往可以代表不同的心情。根据不同颜色的特点以及给人留下的感觉，颜色的选择在日常生活中往往也起着一定的作用。本文以其中的一些颜色为例作了相关的解释说明，是一篇知识性很强的文章。‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．B。根据上文的strong feeling可知anger最合乎文意。‎ ‎　　2．C。下文所列举的例子STOP signs和 fire engines都属于危险信号，故选择danger。‎ ‎　　3．B。根据常识，黄色应是秋天树叶的颜色，故应选leaves。‎ ‎　　4．A。下文提到人们把黄色和幸福联系起来，说明黄色是一个充满生机的颜色，故选lively。‎ ‎　　5．C。下文提到黄色是令人愉快的颜色，根据常识太阳光的颜色是黄色，故选sunlight。‎ ‎　　6．B。绿色是春季里草的颜色，故选spring。‎ ‎　　7．C。speak后面往往接某种语言作宾语；say后面常接说话的内容；tell的宾语一般是人；talk about sth.意为谈论某事物。故C为正确选项。‎ ‎　　8．B。根据上文对yellow的解释。说明yellow也属于warm color。‎ ‎　　9．C。与下文喜欢冷色调的人相对应，再根据上文对各种暖色调的选择，active合乎文意为正确选项。‎ ‎　　10．D。others相当于other people意为“别的人”。another指“另一个”。other one不可单独使用，the other one指“另外的一个”。‎ ‎　　11．A。四个选项中只有black可归纳到冷色调当中去。‎ ‎　　12．B。go around意为“到处走动”；go off 意为“离开，爆炸”；go along意为“前进，进行”；go by意为“走过，流逝”。根据文意，应选go by。‎ ‎　　13．B。way根据上文，暖色调的环境下时间似乎过得更慢，说明暖色调是用来装饰居室和饭馆的好方法，故选择way。‎ ‎　　14．C。比较四个场所只有饭馆适合使用暖色调。‎ ‎　　15．B。与暖色调相对立，冷色调适用于办公室，以使人感觉时间过得比较快。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇（2）‎ Charlie came from a poor village. His parents had __1__ money to send him to school when he was young. The boy was very sad. Mr. King lived next to him. He found the boy __2__ and had pity on him and lent some money to him. So the boy could go to school. He studied hard and __3__ all his lessons. When he finished middle school, the man introduced him to his friend in the town. And he began to work.‎ ‎　　Once Mr. King was seriously hurt in an accident. Dying, he asked Charlie to take care of his daughter, Sharon. The young man __4__ and several years later he married the girl. He loved her very much and tried his best to make her happy. He often bought beautiful clothes and delicious food for her. He was good at cooking and he cooked __5__ for her. So she became very fat and she felt it difficult to walk. And one day she found there was something wrong with her heart. Her husband wasn’t at home and she had to go to __6__ at once. The doctors looked her over and told her __7__ eat meat, sugar, chocolate and things like these. She was afraid __8__ the doctor’s words and wrote all the names of the food on the paper. When she got home, she put the list on the table and __9__. When she returned home that afternoon, she found many kinds of food: meat, sugar and chocolate in the kitchen. Charlie was busy __10__ there. As soon as he saw her, he said happily, “I’ve bought all the food you like, dear!”‎ ‎　　1. A. no B. some C. much D. enough ‎　　2. A. lazy B. clever C. careful D. hard ‎　　3. A. did well in B. was poor at C. was working D. was good for ‎　　4. A. was angry B. thought hard C. agreed D. said “No.”‎ ‎　　5. A. a little B. a few C. many D. a lot ‎　　6. A. rest B. sleep C. hospital D. work ‎　　7. A. should B. would C. to D. not to ‎　　8. A. to remember B. to forget C. to catch D. to teach ‎　　9. A. slept B. went out C. cooked D. ate ‎　　10. A. reading B. seeing C. cooking D. writing ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了查理为报答金先生生前对自己的大恩大德，在娶了金先生女儿为妻之后精心照料她，却导致妻子营养过剩而患病去医院检查。医生列出她不能吃的食物，深爱妻子的查理不明情况，反而照单为妻子买了上面的各种食物。‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。查理家境贫困，父母没有钱资助他上学，故选no。‎ ‎　　2. B。根据下文，查理不负众望，说明他聪明好学，故选clever。‎ ‎　　3. A。查理学习刻苦，并顺利完成了学业，说明他各门功课成绩较好，故选did well in。D选项介词用错，正确词组为was good at。‎ ‎　　4. C。根据下文查理娶了金先生女儿为妻并精心呵护她，说明查理同意了金先生的请求，故选agreed。‎ ‎　　5. D。根据下文妻子胖得不能走路，说明她食物吃得多。此外食物为不可数名词，因此只能用a lot of来修饰。‎ ‎　　6. C。心脏不好，应去医院检查，下文指出为她检查的正是医生，故选hospital。‎ ‎　　7. D。由于她的病是因营养过剩引起的，医生应让她不要吃肉，糖果之类的食物，故选not to。‎ ‎　　8. B。她害怕忘了医生的指示，因此将其写在纸上，故选to forget。‎ ‎　　9. B。与下文相对应，这里应填went out。‎ ‎　　10. C。擅长烹饪的查理将菜买回之后，肯定要忙着为爱妻做饭，故cooking为正确答案。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇（3）‎ Why do I want to go to college? No one has ever asked me __1 _ a question. But many times I have asked myself. I have __2__ a whole variety of reasons. __3__ important reason is that I want to be a better man.‎ ‎　　Many things make human beings different __4__ or better than or even superior to animals.‎ ‎　　One of the most important things is __5__ . If I fail to receive higher education, my education __6__. As I want to be a fully __7__ man, I must get a well-rounded education, which good colleges and universities are supposed to __8__. I know one can get educated in many ways, but colleges and universities are __9__ the best places to teach me how to educate myself. Only when I am well-educated, will I be a better human being and __10__ fit into society.‎ ‎　　1. A. quite B. so C. such D. another ‎　　2. A. come up with B. agreed with C. been fed up with D. got on well with ‎　　3. A. Most B. The most C. More D. Much ‎　　4. A. to B. around C. between D. from ‎　　5. A. education B. weather C. temperature D. science ‎　　6. A. finished B. don’t finish C. will not finish D. has finished ‎　　7. A. develop B. developed C. developing D. experience ‎　　8. A. improve B. graduate C. hear D. provide ‎　　9. A. between B. among C. inside D. outside ‎　　10. A. can good B. may better C. be able to better D. be able to best ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文主要围绕“我为什么要上大学？”这一话题展开讨论，首先介绍了教育对人发展的重要性，然后说明大学在教育中的地位，从而层次分明地解释了上大学的原因。‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。such常用在不定冠词或名词前修饰可数名词或不可数名词，表示“此类的”、“这种的”，故such为正确选项。‎ ‎　　2. A。come up with意为“提出、找出”；agree with意为“同意”；be fed up with意为“对……厌倦”；get on well with意为“和……相处得好”。根据文意A为正确选项。‎ ‎　　3. B。上文讲到我曾找到过各种各样的原因，其中最重要的原因应当是……，因此这里应用important的最高级，故选the most。‎ ‎　　4. D。固定结构be different from 表示“不同于……”。‎ ‎　　5. A。本段着重说明了教育在人的发展中的作用，以及大学在教育中的地位。作为总括句，本空应填education。‎ ‎　　6. C。这是一个含有条件状语从句的复合句，意为“如果我不能受到更高等的教育，我就无法完成我的学业”，故选will not finish为正确选择。‎ ‎　　7. B。这里只能选可作定语的选项。过去分词developed表示“成熟的”，为正确选项。‎ ‎　　8. D。大学应是提供高等教育的地方, provide符合文意为正确选项。‎ ‎　　9. B。介词among可表示”包括……在内”为正确选项。‎ ‎　　10. C。与前半句相对应，这里仍应用比较级，而may better意思不对，因此be able to better为正确选项。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇（4）‎ Farley worked for the Canadian government. One day, he was __1__ to learn more about wolves. Do wolves kill lots of caribou（北美驯鹿）? Do they kill people?‎ ‎　　They gave him lots of food and clothes and guns. Then they put him on a plane and took him to __2__. The plane put him down and went away. There were no houses or people in this place. But there were lots of animals and lots of wolves.‎ ‎　　People tell terrible stories about wolves. They say wolves like to kill and eat people. Farley remembered these stories, and he was __3__. He had his gun with him__4_.‎ ‎　　Then one day, he saw a group of wolves. There was a mother wolf with four baby wolves. A father wolf and another young wolf lived with them.‎ ‎　　Farley watched these wolves every day. The mother was a very __5__ mother. She gave milk to her babies. She gave them lessons about life. They learned how to __6__ food. The father wolf got food for the mother. The young wolf __7__ the children. They were a nice, happy family—wolf family! Farley did not need his __8__ any more. In a short time, he got on well with the family. Farley watched them for five months. He learned that many stories about the wolves were __9__. Wolves do not eat people, and they do not eat many large animals. And he also learned bad things about men. It was men who killed many caribou and wolves.‎ ‎　　Later, Farley wrote a book about wolves. He wanted people to __10__ them and not to kill them.‎ ‎　　1. A. seen B. told C. heard D. found ‎　　2. A. a small town B. a big city C. a far place D. a lonely village ‎　　3. A. afraid B. happy C. angry D. tired ‎　　4. A. at times B. all the time C. once a week D. every afternoon ‎　　5. A. bad B. good C. hungry D. thirsty ‎　　6. A. cook B. make C. get D. pick ‎　　7. A. shouted at B. looked into C. laughed at D. played with ‎　　8. A. food B. clothes C. gun D. plane ‎　　9. A. not good B. not true C. not easy D. not clear ‎　　10. A. grow B. have C. teach D. understand ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　狼历来被世人视为凶残的动物,事实是否的确如此呢？带着这一疑问，Farley进行了实地考察，在和狼进行了零距离的接触后, 改变了自己的观点。本文告诉我们要学会根据事实说话。‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1.B。Farley是政府工作人员。从上下文得知, 他是被派去进行调查和研究狼的习性的，故选told。‎ ‎　　2 C。根据下文飞机把Farley送到了一个没有房屋和人的地方, 说明了这个地方不可能是城市,小镇和村庄故a far place为正确答案。‎ ‎　　3 A。狼吃人的恐怖故事给孤身一人的Farley带来的应是afraid。‎ ‎　　4 B。因为Farley害怕, 所以枪应始终不能离身。all the time意为“一直、始终”。‎ ‎　　5 B。根据下文的描述，狼妈妈给孩子们喂奶，对孩子们进行训练，可见是一位好妈妈，故选good。‎ ‎　　6 C。狼只能猎取食物, 而不能烧食物, 生产食物。get合乎文意，为正确答案。‎ ‎　　7 D。shout at意为“朝……大声叫喊”；look into意为“调查、观察”；laugh at意为“嘲笑……”。这三个词组都不符文意。play with意为“和……一起玩耍”，合文意为正确答案。‎ ‎　　8 C。the nice happy wolf family让Farley不再害怕，因此也就不再需要枪了，故选择gun.。‎ ‎　　9 B。因为他的亲身体验与他所听到的相违背，说明以前关于狼的说法是不对的, 故选not true。‎ ‎10. D。understand意为“了解”合乎文意，为正确答案。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇 6‎ Who designed (设计) the first helicopter (直升飞机)? Who __1__ of the most famous pictures in the world? Who knew more about the human body than most __2__? There is an answer __3__ all these questions --- ‎ Leonardo de Vinci (达芬奇). ‎ Leonardo may have been the greatest genius (天才) __4__ have ever known. He lived in Italy around the year 1500, but many of his inventions seem modern to us today. For example, one of his notebooks has drawings of a helicopter. Of course, he couldn’t __5__ a helicopter with the things he had. But scientists say his idea would have worked. ‎ But Leonardo __6__ an inventor. He was one of the greatest artists of his day. By the time he was twenty years old, he was called a master ( 大师) painter, and as he got older he became __7__ more famous. Sometimes he drew a hand ten different ways __8__ he was ready to paint. ‎ Many of Leonardo’s wonderful paintings are still with __9__ today. You may know one of his most famous works the __10__ woman known as the Mona Lisa. ‎ ‎　　1. A. took B. made C. painted D. invented ‎ ‎　　2. A. artists B. doctors C. painters D. people ‎ ‎　　3. A. to B. of C. for D. from ‎ ‎　　4. A. the scientists B. the artists C. the world D. people ‎ ‎　　5. A. draw B. paint C. work D. build ‎ ‎　　6. A. was just B. wasn’t just C. wasn’t D. was no longer ‎ ‎　　7. A. less B. no C. even D. very ‎ ‎　　8. A. before B. after C. because D. when ‎ ‎　　9. A. him B. us C. them D. you ‎ ‎　　10. A. interesting B. crying C. smiling D. surprising ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了堪称世界上最伟大的天才——达?芬奇在发明、艺术等方面为人类所作的巨大贡献，文章层次分明，通俗易懂。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．C。为了引出话题人物━━达?芬奇，这里引用了设问手法，问题应表示“是谁画了世界上最著名的画”，故选择动词painted。 ‎ ‎　　2．B。对人体比较了解的莫过于医生了，将达?芬奇与医生相比才能显示其对人体的精通。故选择doctors。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。介词to常表示一一对应的关系，“问题的答案”习惯表达为an answer to a question。 ‎ ‎　　4．D。达?芬奇应是世人所知道的天才中最伟大的人，the world 一般指每个人，相当于第三人称单数，故people为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　5．D。draw和paint不合文意, work为不及物动词，不能直接接宾语。在那个时代，达?芬奇所不能做的应是制造飞机，故选择build。 ‎ ‎　　6．B。这一句起承上启下的作用，意为“达?芬奇不仅仅是一名发明家”，故选择 wasn’t just。 ‎ ‎　　7．C。less和no不合文章，very不能用来修饰比较级，而even常用来修饰比较级，意为“甚至更……”，故为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　8．A。为了使自己的画达到最高境界，应在画这幅画之前去尝试不同的画法，所以应选before。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。达?芬奇的画今天依然保存在世，为本文作者以及读者所共享，所以应选us。 ‎ ‎　　10．C。达?芬奇的名作━━Mona Lisa以画中人物面部神秘的微笑而名扬天下，故选smiling ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇7‎ Once, a king showed two men a large basket in the garden. He told them to fill it with water from a well. After they __1__ their work, he left them, saying, “When the sun is down, I will come and see your work.” ‎ At last one of them said, “What’s the use of doing this foolish work? We can __2__ fill the basket.” __3__ man answered, “That is none of your business.” The first man said. “You may do as you like, but I am not going to work at __4__ so foolish.” He __5__ his bucket and went away. The other man said no word, and kept on carrying __6__. At last the well was almost __7__. ‎ As he poured the last bucket of water into the basket, he saw a bright thing in it. He picked it up. It was a beautiful gold ring. Just then the king came. __8__ he saw the ring, he knew that he had found the kind of man he wanted. He told him to keep the ring for himself. “You __9__ so well in this little thing,” he said, “ __10__ now I know I can believe you with many things.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. finished B. did C. began D. had ‎ ‎　　2. A. ever B. never C. easily D. no ‎ ‎　　3. A. The other B. Another C. One D. A second ‎ ‎　　4. A. anything B. something C. nothing D. everything ‎ ‎　　5. A. picked up B. put away C. took away D. threw away ‎ ‎　　6. A. water B. basket C. well D. work ‎ ‎　　7. A. full B. empty C. filled D. clean ‎ ‎　　8. A. While B. As soon as C. Before D. Since ‎ ‎　　9. A. have done B. will do C. do D. are doing ‎ ‎　　10. A. what B. why C. when D. that ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了一个国王为了考验两个人，让他们往篮子里打水，忠诚的人不遗余力地往空篮子里打水，直到国王归来。结果不仅获得了一枚金戒指，而且得到了国王的信任。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．C。这里did和finished都表示完成了这项工作，而给篮子装满水是不可能的，国王应在两人开始打水后不久离开，所以应选began。 ‎ ‎　　2．B。往篮子里盛满水是永远不可能的，故选择never。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。两者中的另一个用the other加名词来表示。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。the first man想离开，因为他觉得自己干的是无用功，故选择nothing意为“从事某项工作”。 ‎ ‎　　5．D。pick up意为“捡起”，pick away意为“放好”，take away意为“取走”，而throw down意为“扔掉、丢弃”，比较贴近文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　6．A。根据文意，另一个人一直在打水，故选water。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。不停地打水必然会导致井空，故选empty。 ‎ ‎　　8．B。while引导从句时，从句应用延续性动词，before和since不符合文意，as soon as…表示“一……就”为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　9．A。国王是因为这个诚实的人所做过的事情而表扬他，所以应用完成时态have done。 ‎ ‎　　10．D。国王讲的最后一句话是含有 “so……that”结构的复合句，意为“如此……以致”故选that。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇8‎ Food is very important. Everyone needs to __1__ well if he or she wants to have a strong body. Our minds also need a kind of food. This kind of food is __2__. We begin to get knowledge even __3__ we are very young. Small children are __4__ in everything around them. They learn __5__ while they are watching and listening. When they are getting older, they begin to __6__ story books, science books…, anything they like. When they find something new, they love to ask questions and __7__ to find out answers. What is the best __8__ to get knowledge? If we learn by ourselves, we will get __9__ knowledge. If we are __10__ getting answers from others and do not ask why, we will never learn well. When we study in the right way, we will learn more and understand better. ‎ ‎　　1. A. sleep B. read C. drink D. eat ‎ ‎　　2. A. sport B. exercise C. knowledge D. meat ‎ ‎　　3. A. until B. when C. after D. so ‎ ‎　　4. A. interested B. interesting C. weak D. better ‎ ‎　　5. A. everything B. something C. nothing D. anything ‎ ‎　　6. A. lend B. read C. learn D. write ‎ ‎　　7. A. try B. have C. refuse D. wait ‎ ‎　　8. A. place B. school C. way D. road ‎ ‎　　9. A. little B. few C. many D. the most ‎ ‎　　10. A. often B. always C. usually D. something ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文说明了知识的重要性，介绍了一个人学习知识的过程以及获取知识的最佳途径，是一篇可读性较强的文章。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．D。本句承接上文，进一步强调食物的重要性，要有强壮的体魄得吃得好，故选eat。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。根据下文，大脑所需要的食物应为knowledge。 ‎ ‎　　3．B。按常理一个人在小的时候就开始学习了，所以应用when引导这里的时间状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　4．A。小孩对知识的接受主要依靠于他们对事物产生的兴趣，词组be interested in sth 表示“对……感兴趣”，而interesting用来形容令人感兴趣的事物，故选择interested。 ‎ ‎　　5．B。孩子们在耳听眼观的过程中经常会学到一些东西。everything过于绝对化 ，nothing、anything 不合文意，应选 something。 ‎ ‎　　6．B。随着年龄的增长，孩子们开始read各类书籍而不是write，learn在这里搭配不当。 ‎ ‎　　7．A。孩子们在学习过程中发现问题时，由于求知的欲望，应尽力去解决问题，故选择try。 ‎ ‎　　8．C。本段主要就学习方法展开讨论，该句应为总括句，空白处当然应填入ways。 ‎ ‎　　9．D。与后面的方法比起来，作者认为独立自主的学习为最佳方法，最佳方法当然应使人获得最多的知识，故选择the most。 ‎ ‎　　10．B。be always doing sth 意为“总是干某事”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇 9‎ Someone says, “Time is money.” But I think time is __1__ important than money. Why? Because when money is spent, we can get it back. However, when time is 2 it’ll never 3 . That’s 4 we mustn’t waste time. ‎ ‎ It goes without saying that the 5 is usually limited. Even a second is very important. We should make full use of our time to do 6__ useful. ‎ ‎ But it is a pity that there are a lot of people who do not know the importance of time. They spent their limited time smoking, drinking and __7 . They do not know that wasting time means wasting part of their own __8 . ‎ ‎ In a word, we should save time. We shouldn’t 9 today’s work for tomorrow. Remember we have no time to 10 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. much B. less C. much less D. even more ‎ ‎　　2. A. cost B. bought C. gone D. finished ‎ ‎　　3. A. return B. carry C. take D. bring ‎ ‎　　4. A. what B. that C. because D. why ‎ ‎　　5. A. money B. time C. day D. food ‎ ‎　　6. A. nothing B. something C. anything D. everything ‎ ‎　　7. A. reading B. writing C. playing D. working ‎ ‎　　8. A. time B. food C. money D. life ‎ ‎　　9. A. stop B. leave C. let D. give ‎ ‎　　10. A. lose B. save C. spend D. take ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　文章讲述了时间的重要性。金钱用完了可以再来，但时间却是一去不复返。告诫我们要珍惜时间，不能虚度年华。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．D。该句中多音节形容词important的比较级应是 more important ，用even来修饰比较级，故选 even more important。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。这里表示时间流逝，故选gone。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。时间流逝就不会再回来，根据文意应选return。 ‎ ‎　　4．D。上文解释了我们为什么不能浪费时间，承接上文应用why。 ‎ ‎　　5．B。时间的流逝悄无声息，故应选 time。 ‎ ‎　　6．B。根据文意可知，我们应珍惜时间，做一些有用的事情，故选something。 ‎ ‎　　7．C。该句列举了一些人浪费时间的例子，四个选项中只有playing能和smoking, drinking 相提并论，故选playing。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。根据文意，浪费时间就是浪费自己的生命，故选life。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。leave意为“留下，剩下”。根据文意，我们不能把今天的事留到明天做，故选 leave。 ‎ ‎　　10．A。这里表示浪费时间，故选lose。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇10‎ Nasreddin was a poor man, so he tried to grow __1__ he could in his own garden, so that he would not have to buy so many in the market. ‎ One evening he heard a noise in his garden and looked out of the window. A white ox had got into the garden and __2__ his vegetables. Nasreddin at once took his stick, ran out and chased the ox, but he was too old to catch it. When he got back to his garden, he found that the ox had ruined most of his precious vegetables. ‎ ‎__3__, while he __4__ in the street near his house, he saw a cart with two white oxen which looked very much like the one that __5__ his vegetables. He was carrying his stick with him, __6__ he at once began to beat the two oxen with it. As neither of them looked more like the ox that had eaten his vegetables than the other, he beat both of them equally hard. ‎ The owner of the ox and cart was drinking coffee in a __7__ coffee-house. When he saw __8__ Nasreddin was doing __9__ his animals, he ran out and shouted, “What are you doing? What have those poor animals done to you for you to beat them like that?” ‎ ‎“You keep out this!” Nasreddin shouted back, “This is a matter between me and one of these two oxen. He knows very well __10__ I am beating him!” ‎ ‎　　1. A. so many vegetables B. many vegetables ‎ ‎　　C. as many as vegetables D. as many vegetables as ‎ ‎　　2. A. was eating B. ate C. had eaten D. has eaten ‎ ‎　　3. A. Next day B. Next morning ‎ ‎　　C. Last morning D. The next morning ‎ ‎　　4. A. walks B. waked C. was walking D. walking ‎ ‎　　5. A. ruined B. had eaten C. ate D. had ruin ‎ ‎　　6. A. so B. and C. but D. or ‎ ‎　　7. A. beside B. nearby C. near D. near by ‎ ‎　　8. A. that B. which C. why D. what ‎ ‎　　9. A. for B. to C. with D. on ‎ ‎　　10.A. reason B. when C. why D. because ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个笑话，贫农Nasreddin在街上碰到两头牛，搞不清是哪一头毁坏了他家的菜园，于是用棒子将两头牛一起抽打，牛主人制止时，他却强词夺理，无理取闹。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．D。习惯用语as many as possible 意为“尽可能多的”合乎文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　2．A。过去进行时强调过去正在进行的动作，根据文意Nasreddin看到牛正在吃蔬菜，故选 was eating 。 ‎ ‎　　3．D。指过去某一天的第一天或第二天早上、晚上，应用the next day/morning/evening。 故应选The next morning 。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。在从句动作进行的过程中，主句动作发生了，这时从句常用进行时态，故选择was walking 。 ‎ ‎　　5．B。牛吃蔬菜是贫农上街之前的事，文章本身讲的是过去的故事，指过去的过去应用过去完成时，故选had eaten。 ‎ ‎　　6．A。从句子意思看，空白处前后构成因果关系，故选择so。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。形容词nearby一般作定语，表示“不远的，附近的”，合乎文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。这里需要一个引导词，引导saw的宾语从句，同时在句子里作do的宾语，故选 what。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。do sth. to sb.结构中to后面常接动作的对象。 ‎ ‎　　10．C。牛主人问及Nasreddin打牛的原因，这里需要一个引导词引导 knew的宾语从句，且在从句中作状语，根据上文可知这里应填 why。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇11‎ Tom grows the nicest vegetables and fruits and the most beautiful flowers in the village. Plants grow in Tom’s garden all through the __1__ and they are much __2__. ‎ Tom cuts some flowers for his sitting room table, eats some fruits and vegetables, but he __3__ most of them in the market. His vegetables, fruit and flowers are so __4__ and beautiful that they sold much more __5__ in the market than those of other villagers. ‎ How does Tom grow these beautiful things? He is so __6__ that he just sits under his orange tree with his radio. ‎ He __7__ the music all day. ‎ That is quite true. Tom __8__ things in spring, summer, autumn and winter. After that he sits with his radio. And everything __9__. It is the music that does the work. Tom knows more clearly that music makes the biggest vegetables and the most beautiful flowers. Plants love __10__ as much as people. ‎ ‎　　1. A. week B. month C. season D. year ‎ ‎　　2. A. better B. worse C. less D. later ‎ ‎　　3. A. buys B. sells C. borrows D. lends ‎ ‎　　4. A. dear B. bad C. big D. small ‎ ‎　　5. A. politely B. quickly C. slowly D. carefully ‎ ‎　　6. A. angry B. busy C. tired D. lazy ‎ ‎　　7. A. listens to B. hears C. watches D. speaks ‎ ‎　　8. A. fills B. plants C. throws D. makes ‎ ‎　　9. A. does B. moves C. grows D. plays ‎ ‎　　10.A. work B. rain C. stories D. music ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了汤姆庭园中各种植物的生长以及销售情况，并说明了懒惰的汤姆为什么能长出这么好的植物。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. D。根据下文汤姆春夏秋冬都会在园子里种各种植物，说明园子里一年到头都长着植物，故year为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。很明显，汤姆的植物园比村子里其余人的应好得多，故应用比较级better。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。根据文意，汤姆到市场上去应是卖自己种植的花，水果及蔬菜，故选sells。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。这里应选择一个褒义形容词修饰汤姆的蔬菜水果，故只能选big。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。因为蔬菜水果长得好，所以在市场上卖得很快，故quickly为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。根据下文汤姆没有花很多的时间去管理园子而是坐在树下听音乐，故选lazy。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。表示听音乐这一动作应用listen to 。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。根据文意，汤姆春夏秋冬在园子里是在种各种植物，故选plant。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。grows在这里表示园子里的一切在不断地生长。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。上文讲到音乐使得园子里的一切又大又美，说明植物也像人一样喜欢音乐，故选music ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇12‎ For several years, Americans have enjoyed teleshopping-watching TV and buying things by phone. Now teleshopping is starting in Europe. In some __1__ countries, people can turn on their __2__ and shop for clothes, jewelry, food, toys and __3__ things. ‎ Teleshopping is becoming popular in Sweden. __4__, the biggest Swedish company sells different kinds of things on TV in fifteen European countries, and in one year, it makes $10 million. In France, there are two teleshopping channels, and the French __5__ about $ 20 million a year in buying things through those channels. ‎ In Germany, __6__ last year teleshopping was only possible on one channel for one hour every day. Then the government allowed more teleshopping. Other channels can __7__ for telebusiness, including the largest American teleshopping company and a 24-hour teleshopping company. German __8__ are hoping these will help them sell more things. ‎ Some people like teleshopping because it allows them to do their shopping without __9__. With all the traffic problems in cities, going shopping is not an easy thing. But at the same time, other Europeans __10__ like this new way of buying things. They call __11__ “junk on the air.” Many Europeans usually worry about the quality of the things __12__ on TV. They think high quality is the most important thing, and they don’t believe they can be sure about the quality of the things __13__. ‎ The need of high quality means that European teleshopping companies will have to be __14__ the American companies. They will have to be more careful about __15__ of the things they sell. They will also have to work harder to sell things that the buyers cannot touch or see by themselves. ‎ ‎　　1. A. European B. Asian C. American D. African ‎ ‎　　2. A. lights B. switches C. radios D. TVs ‎ ‎　　3. A. some else B. another many C. the other D. many other ‎ ‎　　4. A. Such as B. For example C. For teleshopping D. It is like ‎ ‎　　5. A. takes B. cost C. spends D. spend ‎ ‎　　6. A. to B. until C. unless D. by ‎ ‎　　7. A. begin B. leave C. open D. turn on ‎ ‎　　8. A. people B. women C. businessmen D. officials ‎ ‎　　9. A. to go out B. going out ‎ ‎　　C. to buy things D. buying things ‎ ‎　　10. A. still B. don’t C. even D. won’t ‎ ‎　　11. A. teleshopping B. TV C. radio D. telephone ‎ ‎　　12. A. appearing B. coming out C. for sale D. to buy ‎ ‎　　13. A. in the shop B. on TV C. they bought D. by this way ‎ ‎　　14. A. the same with B. different from ‎ ‎　　C. as big as D. larger than ‎ ‎　　15. A. the number B. the quality C. the places D. the buyers ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了发源于美国并流行于欧洲各国的电话购物法，说明了电话购物法的发展情况以及受大众欢迎的原因，同时也指出了这种购物法存在的问题，并提出了解决这些问题的途径。‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。上文讲到电话购物法在欧洲也开始起步，本句承接上文，对欧洲的情况作进一步介绍，因此，应选European。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。电话购物法,应通过看电视选择物品，然后电话订购, 故应选TVs。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。else为副词不用来修饰名词作定语。the other things意为“别的所有商品”不合文意，选项many other things意为“别的许多商品”为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。such as中的as为介词，因此该词组用于列举时，后面常直接接名词或名词性短语。而for example用于列举时与后面例子常用逗号隔开。因此B为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。分析句子，不难发现本句使用了“spend money in dong something”这一结构，且主语the French为第三人称复数，故应用spend的原形。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。该句子表示“在德国，每天电话购物法仅在一个频道播放一个小时，这种情况一直持续到去年”，表示某状态一直持续到某个点时间，应用“until + 点时间”。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。这里open表示“开放，开张，营业”，本句表示电影频道对电话购物实行了开放政策，可用来进行电话购物。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。很明显，电话购物法为商人销售产品提供了一个极佳的渠道。因此本句表达了商人的愿望。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。without为介词。后面应跟动词的-ing形式。根据文意，going out应为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。根据本句开头的But以及下文内容，这里提到的是对电话购物持反对态度的人。故选don’t。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。一些人不喜欢电话购物法，称其为“垃圾”。故应选teleshopping。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。人们担心的是电视上正在销售的产品的质量。A，B意思不对。for sale表示“待售”，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。电话购物法令人们担心的是电视上展销的商品的质量，而不是商店里的商品，也不是已经买到手的商品。故选on TV。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。根据上文，欧洲人的购物观念与美国人有所不同。因此电话购物公司也得采取不同的措施。固定结构be different form意为“不同于……”为正确答案。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。根据上文，消费者关心的是质量。因此电话购物公司必须对质量倍加小心。故选择quality。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇 13‎ Last Friday, after doing all the family shopping in the town. I wanted to have a rest before catching the rain. I __1__ a newspaper and some chocolate and __2__ into the station coffee shop. It was a cheap self-service place with long tables to __3__ at. I put my heavy bag down on the floor, __4__ the newspaper and the chocolate on the table and then went to get a cup of coffee. ‎ When I came back with the coffee, There was someone __5__ in the next seat. __6__ was a boy, with dark glasses and old clothes, and __7__ bright red at the front. He had started to eat my chocolate! ‎ Naturally, I was rather uneasy about him, but I didn’t want to have any __8__. I just read the newspaper, tasted my coffee and took a bit of chocolate. The boy looked at me in __9__.Then he took a __10__ piece of my chocolate. I could hardly believe it. Still I didn’t say anything to him. When he took a third piece, I felt more angry than uneasy. I thought, “Well, I shall have the last piece.” And I got it. ‎ The boy gave me a strange look, then __11__ up. As he left, he shouted out, “There’s something __12__ with that woman!” Everyone looked at me, __13__ I didn’t want to quarrel with the boy, so I kept quiet. I did not realize that I had __14__ a mistake until I finished my coffee and was ready to __15__. My face turned red when I saw my unopened chocolate under the newspaper. The chocolate that I had been eating was the boy’s! ‎ ‎　　1. A. stole B. bought C. sold D. wrote ‎ ‎　　2. A. went B. sat C. seated D. looked ‎ ‎　　3. A. sit B. seat C. lie D. laugh ‎ ‎　　4. A. pushed B. took C. put D. pulled ‎ ‎　　5. A. jumping B. playing C. sitting D. sleeping ‎ ‎　　6. A. He B. It C. Who D. What ‎ ‎　　7. A. cut B. washed C. covered D. colored ‎ ‎　　8. A. coffee B. trouble C. chocolate D. matter ‎ ‎　　9. A. carelessness B. anger C. surprise D. happiness ‎ ‎　　10. A. first B. second C. very D. last ‎ ‎　　11. A. stood B. took C. cried D. looked ‎ ‎　　12. A. strange B. wrong C. OK D. funny ‎ ‎　　13. A. and B. but C. so D. while ‎ ‎　　14. A. spelt B. corrected C. made D. found ‎ ‎　　15. A. finish B. leave C. jump D. shop ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是“我”外出购物时的一次尴尬的经历，故事贴近生活，生动有趣，读这样的文章有助于我们在今后的生活中避免出现类似的错误。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。为了消磨时间，“我”买了报纸和巧克力，故选bought。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。由文章推理出，“我”走进了一家咖啡店，故应选went。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。 to sit at 是作为tables的后置定语，意为“可以在旁边就坐的桌子” 。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。按常理“我”应把报纸等放在桌子上，而不是推到或拉到桌子上故应选 put。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。由下文可知，回来时“我”发现他开始吃“我”的东西，说明他坐在桌旁，故选 sitting。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。由下文可知，对方是一个男子，故用he指代。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。头发应是被染成红色的，故应选colored。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。面对这样一个男子，“我”不想惹麻烦，trouble合乎文意为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。由下文可知，“我”吃的是这个男子的巧克力，这引起了对方的某一反应，比较四个选项，再根据上文，用名词surprise比较合乎当时的情形。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。习惯用语“a second + 名词”，常用来表示“再一个，又一个” ‎ ‎　　11. A。根据文意可知那个男孩起身要走，故选择stood。 ‎ ‎　　12. B。男孩生气了，必定说了发泄的话，比较四个选项wrong为最佳选择。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。男孩骂了“我”导致大家都朝“我”看，而“我”不想与他争吵，可见“我”的反应与上文描述的气氛恰恰相反，故选择but构成转折关系。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。固定搭配make a mistake意为“犯了个错误”。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。“我” 在喝完咖啡准备离开时发现了自己的过错，故应选leave。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇14‎ Rosa liked making up stories. She was so __1__ that her classmates believed her from time to time. In fact, the whole class believed her! At first she supposed it was __2__. Now, as she got up to __3__ before the class, She knew that make –believe stories had some way of coming back to make you sad. ‎ Rosa’s parents were separated. Nine months out of the year, Rosa lived with her mother in an apartment on Anderson Street. But when summer __4__, she went to her father’s farm in Arizona. ‎ The farm was great! Rosa rode horses and __5__ with some farm work. Her father, however, was so __6__ that he couldn’t find time to go places with her. When she arrived each summer, her father would __7__ her at the airport and take her out to eat. And the day she went back to the __8__ he would always buy her a present. ‎ When summer came to a close, Rosa __9__ to her mother. At school she heard lots of stories her friends told about their family trips. Rosa wished she had a __10__ to talk about. ‎ Not long after __11__ began, Rosa was looking through travel magazines in the school library. They talked about many exciting __12__, like England and Germany. When Rosa’s friends asked what she had done that summer, she made up something that was not __13__. Remembering the travel magazines she had looked at, she told her classmates that she and her father had gone to __14__. ‎ When the class began studying England, Mr. Thomas asked Rosa to tell all the things she could __15__ about her trip to England! ‎ ‎　　1. A. afraid B. worried C. sure D. happy ‎ ‎　　2. A. joke B. fun C. turn D. game ‎ ‎　　3. A. talk B. teach C. show D. travel ‎ ‎　　4. A. passed B. arrived C. lasted D. changed ‎ ‎　　5. A. made B. played C. helped D. did ‎ ‎　　6. A. weak B. pleased C. busy D. lonely ‎ ‎　　7. A. show B. visit C. meet D. send ‎ ‎　　8. A. farm B. city C. family D. school ‎ ‎　　9. A. wrote B. called C. moved D. returned ‎ ‎　　10. A. family B. school C. teacher D. farm ‎ ‎　　11. A. meeting B. school C. summer D. talk ‎ ‎　　12. A. people B. cities C. languages D. places ‎ ‎　　13. A interesting B. true C. long D. same ‎ ‎　　14. A. England B. Germany C. farm D. home ‎ ‎　　15. A. think B. see C. remember D. read ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了父母已离异的罗莎喜欢编谎言骗人，从中获得乐趣。暑假过后其他同学都在谈假期中的家庭旅游时，罗莎只得自欺欺人，骗大家说她与爸爸去了英国。结果上课时，老师让她谈英国的情况时，她无话可说了。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。罗莎的谎言经常让同学们信以为真，说明她骗人时自信心强，把握大。故选择sure.。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。与下文罗莎自欺欺人相对应，一开始她认为骗人是件快乐的事，故选择fun。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。根据文意，经过这件事后她意识到骗人其实就是骗自己，这种意识在平时与大伙交谈时更为强烈，故选talk。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。夏天到时，罗莎就会到爸爸农场去度假，故选arrive。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。help with sth. 意为“帮助干些事情”。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。爸爸没时间陪她去其它地方游玩，说明爸爸很忙，故选busy。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。这里meet表示爸爸去机场接她。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。在农场度假结束后，罗莎应返回城里，故选city. ‎ ‎　　9. D。根据文意暑假结束了，罗莎要返回到妈妈身边。故选 returned. ‎ ‎　　10. A。与上文相对应，她的朋友都在谈假期与家人的旅游，罗莎因此希望拥有一个完整的家庭。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。假期结束了，新学期又开始了，且下文讲到了学校里的事情，故选school。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。下文的例子既不是城市也不是人或语言而是两个国家，只有选places。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。别人问起她夏天的旅游情况时，她只有编织一些不真实的事情骗大家，故选true。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。下文老师让她讲在英国旅行的情况，说明她骗大家去了英国，故选England。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。老师让罗莎对过去的事情进行回忆并讲述，故选remember。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇15‎ Most parents, I suppose, have had the experience of reading a bedtime story __1__ their children. And they must have realized how difficult it is to write a __2__ children’s book. Either the author has aimed (定目标) too __3__, so that children can’t follow what is in his ( or more often, her ) story, __4__ the story seems to be talking to the readers. ‎ The best children’s books are __5__ very difficult nor very simple, and satisfy（令人满意的） the __6__ who hears the story and the adult（成年人） who __7__ it. Unfortunately（不幸的是）, there are in fact few books like this, __8__ the problem of finding the right bedtime story is not __9__ to solve. This may be why many of the books regarded as __10__ of children’s literature（文学） were in fact written for __11__ “Alice in Wonderland” is perhaps the most obvious（明显）of this. ‎ Children, left for themselves, often __12__ the worst possible interest in literature. Just leave a child in a bookshop or a __13__ and he will more willingly choose the books written in an unimaginative (并非想象的 ) way, or have a look at the most children’s comics（连环图书）, full of the stories and jokes which are the rejections of teachers and righting-thinking parents. ‎ Perhaps we parents should stop __14__ to brainwash（洗脑）children into accepting（接受）our taste in literature. After all, children and adults are so __15__ that we parents should not expect that they will enjoy the same books. So I suppose we’ll just have to compromise（妥协）over the bedtime story. ‎ ‎　　1. A. to B. in C. with D. around ‎ ‎　　2. A. short B. long C. bad D. good ‎ ‎　　3. A. easy B. short C. high D. difficult ‎ ‎　　4. A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎ ‎　　5. A. both B. neither C. either D. very ‎ ‎　　6. A. child B. father C. mother D. teacher ‎ ‎　　7. A. hears B. buys C. understands D. reads ‎ ‎　　8. A. but B. however C. so D. because ‎ ‎　　9. A. hard B. easy C. enough D. fast ‎ ‎　　10.A. articles B. work C. arts D. works ‎ ‎　　11. A. grown-ups B. girls C. boys D. children ‎ ‎　　12. A. are B. show C. find D. add ‎ ‎　　13. A. school B. home C. office D. library ‎ ‎　　14. A. going B. liking C. trying D. preferring ‎ ‎　　15. A. same B. friendly C. different D. common ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文说明了写一本供孩子读的好书并非一件容易的事，并且告诫家长不要一味强迫孩子接受大人的观点，因为孩子和大人在兴趣方面不尽相同。本文具有一定的教育意义，有助于改变家长一些错误的观点。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。read to somebody 意为“读给某人听”，to后面接动作的对象。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据下文可知，存在的困难在于如何把孩子们的书写好。故选 good。 ‎ ‎　　C。书中的内容让孩子们无法理解，说明作者的目标定得高。故选 high。 ‎ ‎　　C。与前文either 对应，这里应用or. “either…or” 意义为“要么……要么……”。 ‎ ‎　　B。与下半句的nor 对应，这里应用neither。 “ neither…nor…” 意为“既不……也不……”。 ‎ ‎　　A。satisfy的宾语除了读故事的成年人以外，当然就是听故事的孩子。故选child。 ‎ ‎　　D。孩子听的故事越来越少，家长把讲故事当成读故事。故选reads。 ‎ ‎　　C。前后两句形成因果关系，所以应用so引导结果状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　B。上文讲好书越来越少，说明去发现好书并非是容易的事。故选easy。 ‎ ‎　　B。名词 works 意为“作品”。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据后面所举的例子以及文意，现在被认为是孩子们读的作品，实际上是为成年人所写的。故选grown-ups。 ‎ ‎　　A。show interest in something 意为“对……感兴趣”。 ‎ ‎　　B。孩子们选书的地点一般是书店或是图书馆。故选library。 ‎ ‎　　D。try to do something 意为“想法设法做某事”，符合当今社会实际情况，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　C。家长不要期望孩子门会接纳他们的观点，因为两者大不相同。故选择different。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇16‎ Mrs. Ball had a son. His name was Mick. She __1__ him very much and as he was not a __2 __ child, she was always __3__ that he might be ill, __4__ she used to take him to see the best __5__ in the town four times a year to be looked __6__. ‎ During one of these __7__, the doctor gave Mick all kinds of tests and then said to him, “Have you had any __8__ with your nose or ears recently?” Mick __9__ for a second and then answered, “Yes, I __10__.” ‎ Mrs. Ball was very __11__. “But I’m sure you have __12__ told me that, Mick!” She said worriedly. “Oh, really?” Said the doctor __13__. “And what trouble have you with your nose and ears, my boy?” “Well,” answered Mick, “I always have trouble with them when I’m __14__ my sweater off, because the __15__ is very tight.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. loved B. hated C. missed D. cared ‎ ‎　　2. A. rich B. clever C. strong D. happy ‎ ‎　　3. A. afraid B. surprised C. glad D. sure ‎ ‎　　4. A. which B. for C. but D. so ‎ ‎　　5. A. player B. teacher C. doctor D. lawyer ‎ ‎　　6. A. round B. over C. for D. after ‎ ‎　　7. A. talks B. years C. visits D. stays ‎ ‎　　8. A. answer B. thing C. word D. trouble ‎ ‎　　9. A. waited B. thought C. stood D. looked ‎ ‎　　10. A. did B. will C. have D. do ‎ ‎　　11. A. excited B. interested C. pleased D. surprised ‎ ‎　　12. A. already B. just C. never D. always ‎ ‎　　13. A. angrily B. seriously C. happily D. carefully ‎ ‎　　14. A. turning B. taking C. keeping D. putting ‎ ‎　　15. A. collar B. nose C. mouth D. ear ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　深爱儿子的鲍尔夫人一直为儿子的健康忧虑，常带他去医院看病，甚至被儿子脱毛衣引起眼睛和鼻子的不适而虚惊一场。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．A。根据下文鲍尔夫人常带儿子去看病可见她非常爱儿子，故选择loved。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。鲍尔夫人担心儿子会有病，常带他医院，说明Nick没有强壮的体魄，故选择Strong。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。上文讲到鲍尔夫人爱儿子，那么儿子的健康状况应让做妈妈的担心才对，而不是惊奇或快乐，故选择afraid。 ‎ ‎　　4．D。两分句从意思上看，应为因果关系，因此应用so引导这个结果状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　5．C。生病了当然是去看医生，再根据下文意思，应选择doctor。 ‎ ‎　　6．B。look over为固定词组，意为“检查”。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。上文提到一年要去医院检查四次，下文将要讲到其中一年里发生的一件事情，故选years从而形成对应。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。have trouble with sth 意为“在某方面有麻烦”为一习惯用语。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。医生问了一个问题，他要作出回答，因此得思考一会儿，故选择thought。 ‎ ‎　　10．C。医生的问题用了现在完成时态，对之作出的回答也应用现在完成时，即：Yes ，I have。 ‎ ‎　　11．D。深爱儿子的妈妈第一次听说儿子鼻子、眼睛有问题应感到惊讶，故选择surprised。 ‎ ‎　　12．C。妈妈感到惊讶是因为她从未听儿子提到过这回事，故应选never。 ‎ ‎　　13．B。医生对自己经常检查的病人，出现新的病情应作为严肃的事情来处理，故应选seriously。 ‎ ‎　　14．B。take a sweater off意为“脱去毛线衣”。 ‎ ‎　　15．A。穿毛衣时衣领子挤压眼、鼻引起疼痛，故应选collar。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇17‎ The computer plays an important part in our everyday life. It is one of the great __1__ in the world in the __2__ century. It works for us not only at home, in the offices, in big shops, __3__ at schools. Today it is used __4__ many ways. It really __5__ the world large wealth (财富) and happiness. ‎ The first computer in the world was __6__ Enid. It was built in America in 1946. It was __7__ and heavy. __8__ it was born, it has been developing very fast. Until now it has gone __9__ four periods（时期，阶段）and changed a lot. There’re many kinds of computers. Computers are getting smaller and smaller and computing faster and faster. It becomes more and more __10__. ‎ The computer can do most of the things __11__ the people. It can help us to __12__ about the real world more quickly, to learn __13__ we want to learn and to think __14__ ourselves. __15__ a student in the twenty-first century, you must work hard at it. ‎ ‎　　1. A. inventions B. discoveries C. robots D. inventors ‎ ‎　　2. A. twenty-first B. twenties C. twelfth D. twentieth ‎ ‎　　3. A. also B. but also C. too D. either ‎ ‎　　4. A. in B. to C. by D. over ‎ ‎　　5. A. takes B. helps C. gets D. brings ‎ ‎　　6. A. found B. invented C. called D. bought ‎ ‎　　7. A. easy B. small C. large D. light ‎ ‎　　8. A. For B. Until C. When D. Since ‎ ‎　　9. A. by B. across C. through D. against ‎ ‎　　10.A. serious B. harmful. C. dangerous D. helpful ‎ ‎　　11.A. for B. to C. at D. with ‎ ‎　　12.A. set B. tell C. know D. talk ‎ ‎　　13.A. what B. that C. which D. who ‎ ‎　　14.A. of B. about C. out D. for ‎ ‎　　15.A. For B. Be C. As D. To ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了电脑的产生、发展以及在我们日常生活中广泛的使用，针对一些人对将来电脑会控制人类的担忧，作者提出了自己的看法。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。one of 后要用可数名词的复数形式，根据文章意思，可知答案是A。 ‎ ‎　　D。要表达第几个世纪，应该用“序数词＋century”，而根据常识，计算机是二十世纪的产物，A项“二十一世纪”与实际不符合。 ‎ ‎　　B。固定搭配not only…but (also)… 意思是“不但……而且……”。所以答案是B。 ‎ ‎　　A。in many ways为一固定用法，表示“在许多方面”。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据文章大意，可知答案是D，表示“给人们带来财富和快乐”。 ‎ ‎　　C。因为Enid是名字，故用called。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据常识可知老式计算机庞大而笨重，故填large。 ‎ ‎　　D。该句句意为“自它诞生之日起，它的发展就非常迅速”，since在意思和时态上与主句呼应，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　C。动词短语go through表示“经历……”。 ‎ ‎　　D。 ‎ ‎　　A。用介词for+宾语表示“为人们做事”，故选A。 ‎ ‎　　C。know about表示“了解”，侧重于有关某人或某事的具体情况。 ‎ ‎　　A。learn后面接的是一个宾语从句，而且连接词在从句中做learn 的宾语，所以只能用what，因为that在宾语从句中是纯连词，只能起连接作用，不能做句子成分。 ‎ ‎　　D。think of表示“想起；认为”；think about表示“考虑”；think out表示“想出”；根据文章含义，答案应是D。 ‎ ‎　　C。介词as表示“作为”，为正确选项。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇18‎ You may think there is only sand in the desert of the world, __1__ it is not true. In the desert, as we know, there is a little __2__, but it is not __3__ for most plants. Still we can see some plants __4__ in the desert. ‎ There is __5__ in some places in the desert. We __6__ these places oases. In the oases, there are villages and towns. People grow __7__ kinds of crops in the fields there. ‎ People __8__ live outside the oases. They have camels, sheep and other animals. These animals depend __9__ the desert plants for their food and do not need __10__ water. ‎ The __11__ are useful to the desert people in many ways. They eat the meat and drink the milk of the animals. They use the camels for carrying water, food, tents and something else. ‎ The people of the desert have to keep moving from place to place. They must always look 12 grass or desert plants for their animals. When there is no more food for their animals, they move to __13__ place. The desert ‎ people are __14__. No man in the desert would ever refuse __15__ the people in trouble and give them food and water. ‎ ‎　　1. A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎ ‎　　2. A. rain B. rains C. wind D. winds ‎ ‎　　3. A. good B. good enough C. enough good D. enough ‎ ‎　　4. A. live B. to live C. lives D. lived ‎ ‎　　5. A. stones B. plants C. wood D. water ‎ ‎　　6. A. say B. tell C. call D. find ‎ ‎　　7. A. every B. all C. a D. one ‎ ‎　　8. A. also B. too C. either D. still ‎ ‎　　9. A. with B. in C. on D. by ‎ ‎　　10. A. a little B. few C. much D. any ‎ ‎　　11. A. water B. plants C. crops D. animals ‎ ‎　　12. A. at B. for C. up D. after ‎ ‎　　13. A. other B. the other C. the others D. another ‎ ‎　　14. A. well B. friend C. friendly D. carefully ‎ ‎　　15. A. help B. helps C. helping D. to help ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了人类是如何利用沙漠中的绿洲、动物，并依靠自身的努力而得以在沙漠中种植庄稼，从而生存下来。说明人定胜天的道理。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。空白部分两句构成转折关系，故选择并列连词but。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。沙漠中风多雨少，rain一词为不可数名词，其复数形式rains表示雨水多，故应选rain。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。这里讲沙漠中的一点点雨水，并不能满足大多数植物生长的需要，故选择enough。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。see sb. do sth.意为“看见某人做某事”，这里应用省去to 的动词不定式。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。沙漠之所以出现绿洲的根本原因是有了水，故选water。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。call 在这里意为“将……称为……”为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。every, a和one 后面都应该接可数名词单数，不能放在kinds 前面。all kinds of 意为“各种各样的”。 ‎ ‎　　8. A。表示“也”时，too 一般放在肯定句末，either放在否定句末，also 放在句中，在此为正确选项，而still 不合题意。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。固定说法depend on意为“依靠”、“凭借”。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。一些动物能在沙漠中生存下来，说明了他们适应了这里雨水稀少的气候，不像其他动物那样需要太多的水，故选择much。 ‎ ‎　　11. D。通读本段不难发现，本段承上文接着讲述动物的用途，故选animals。 ‎ ‎　　12. B。固定说法look for 意思为“寻找”。 ‎ ‎　　13. D。other 后接可数名词时应用复数形式；the other 后接可数名词单数时表示两者中的另一个，不合文意。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。根据下文沙漠里的人从不会拒绝帮助别人，说明他们彼此友好。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。固定搭配refuse to do sth.意为“拒绝干某事”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇19‎ Once upon a time, a rich man wanted to make a trip (旅行) to another town. He tried not only to take things to sell but also to take money to 1 things with. He 2 to take ten servants with him. They would 3 the things to sell and the food to 4 on their trip. Before they started, a little boy ran up to 5 and asked to 6 with them. ‎ ‎ The rich man said to the little boy, “Well, 7 may go with us. 8 you are the smallest, the thinnest ‎ and the weakest of all my 9 , you can’t carry a 10 load (担子). You must 11 the lightest one to carry.” The boy thanked his master and chose the biggest load to carry. That was bread. ‎ ‎“You are 12 .” said his master, “That is the biggest and the heaviest one.” The boy said 13 and lifted the load gladly. ‎ ‎ On the trip they walked for days and at last they got to the town. All the servants were tired 14 the little servant. Do you know 15 ? Most of the bread was eaten during the trip and a little was left when they arrived at the town. ‎ ‎　　1. A. eat B. buy C. change D. get ‎ ‎　　2. A. decided B. liked C. hoped D. tried ‎ ‎　　3. A. take B. bring C. carry D. borrow ‎ ‎　　4. A. cook B. eat C. buy D. drink ‎ ‎　　5. A. them B. the servants （仆人） ‎ ‎　　C. the road D. the rich man ‎ ‎　　6. A. stop B. stay C. go D. talk ‎ ‎　　7. A. you B. he C. I D. they ‎ ‎　　8. A. Since B. If C. Because D. But ‎ ‎　　9. A. family B. guests C. servants D. things ‎ ‎　　10. A. heavy B. light C. small D. difficult ‎ ‎　　11. A. eat B. choose C. pick up D. understand ‎ ‎　　12. A. brave B. right C. clever D. foolish ‎ ‎　　13. A. sorry B. nothing C. angrily D. good-bye ‎ ‎　　14. A. besides B. of C. except D. with ‎ ‎　　15. A. who B. him C. that D. why ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了一个聪明的小男孩的故事。他要求加入一位富人的旅行，在得到同意后 选择担子时，看似愚蠢地选择了最大、最重的担子。而这恰恰就是他的聪明之处，因为他所挑的面包在途中是被边走边吃的，到达目的地时已所剩无几。阅读这故选foolish。篇文章时要注意句子的整体理解，如第8、9、10这三题。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。这位富人不仅带了东西去卖，而且带钱去“买”东西。解这道题时要注意将句中and前后的内容进行比较。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。根据他的想法，他“决定”要带十个仆人。这件事完全可以由他自己决定，所以没有必要“希望带……”或“努力带……”，故C、D不合题意。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。carry在句中意为“携带、运送”；take 意为“带走”；bring意为“带来”。本句意为“他们将运送要卖的东西和在路上要吃的食物”。下文的第10、11两题所在的句子也有提示。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。参照第3题。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。一个小男孩来找这位富人，要求和他们一起走，故选 the rich man。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。参照第5题。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。富人同意小男孩随行。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。此句和上文是转折关系,意为“但是你是我的仆人中最小的、最瘦的、最弱的一个，你不能挑重担”，故选but。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。参照第8题。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。参照第8题。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。此句意为“你要选择挑最轻的担子”，“pick up”意为“捡起”，不合文意，故选choose。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。主人看到这个小仆人选择了最重的担子，感到他很“愚蠢”，故选foolish。。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。听了主人的话，小男孩“什么也没说”，而是高兴地挑起了担子。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。由于小男孩的聪明，“除了”他自己，其他仆人都累坏了。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。Do you know why? 用在文章最后用来引出原因，告诉读者其中的奥妙。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇20‎ Peter’s job was to examine cars when they crossed the frontier to make sure that they were not smuggling anything into the country. Every evening he would see a factory worker coming __1__ the hill towards the frontier, __2__ a bike with a pile of goods of old straw on it. When the bike __3__ the frontier, Peter would stop the man and __4__ him take the straw off and untie it. Then he would examine the straw very __5__ to see __6__ he could find anything, after which he would look in all the man’s pockets __7__ he let him tie the straw again. The man would then put it on his bike and go off down the hill with it. Although Peter was always __8__ to find gold or other valuable things __9__ in the straw, he never found __10__. He was sure the man was __11__ something, but he was not __12__ to think out what it could be. ‎ Then one evening, after he had looked __13__ the straw and emptied the worker’s pockets __14__ usual, he __15__ to him, “Listen, I know you are smuggling things __16__ this frontier. Won’t you tell me what it is? I’m an old man, and today’s my last day on the __17__. Tomorrow I’m going to __18__. I promise I shall not tell __19__ if you tell me what you’ve been smuggling.” The worker did not say anything for __20__. Then he smiled, turned to Peter and said quietly, “Bikes.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. towards B. down C. to D. up ‎ ‎　　2. A. filling B. pulling C. pushing D. carrying ‎ ‎　　3. A. arrived B. appeared C. came D. reached ‎ ‎　　4. A. ask B. order C. make D. call ‎ ‎　　5. A. carefully B. quickly C. silently D. horribly ‎ ‎　　6. A. that B. where C. how D. whether ‎ ‎　　7. A. before B. after C. first D. so ‎ ‎　　8. A. lucky B. hoping C. thinking D. wondering ‎ ‎　　9. A. had been B. hidden C. hiding D. have been ‎ ‎　　10. A. nothing B. something C. everything D. anything ‎ ‎　　11. A. taking B. smuggling C. stealing D. pushing ‎ ‎　　12. A. possible B. strong C. able D. clever ‎ ‎　　13. A. through B. thoroughly C. upon D. up ‎ ‎　　14. A. like B. more C. then D. as ‎ ‎　　15. A. told B. cried C. ordered D. said ‎ ‎　　16. A. cross B. past C. across D. into ‎ ‎　　17. A. thing B. work C. job D. duty ‎ ‎　　18. A. rest B. back C. retire D. retreat ‎ ‎　　19. A. everyone B. anyone C. no one D. someone ‎ ‎　　20. A. moment B. long time C. sometime D. some time ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇完型填空讲述了身为边防检查员的彼得明知一个工厂工人在走私货物却无法抓住对方的把柄。在退休的前一天，彼得恳请其说出真相，结果令彼得恍然大悟。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．D。根据下文这个工人越过边界后，走下山坡，所以到达边界之前应在朝山上走。故选up。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。这名工人是在推着一辆装有稻草的自行车，故选动词pushing。 ‎ ‎　　3．D。这里表达的是到达边界之意arrive, come为不及物动词不可直接接 the frontier，故选reached。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。ask与order后接不定式的复合结构时，动词前应有to, make后接不定式的复合结构时，动词前to要省去。根据下文应选make。 ‎ ‎　　5．A。彼得想发现这个工人在走私什么，所以应仔细地检查。故选carefully。 ‎ ‎　　6．D。这里根据文意，应选择表示“是否”之意的whether作宾语从句的引导词。 ‎ ‎　　7．A。根据常理，彼得应先检查这个工人的口袋才能让他捆起稻草走人，故选before。 ‎ ‎　　8．B．根据文意，彼得心中一直怀着查获走私物品的希望，故选hoping。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。这里things和hide之间是被动关系,现在分词hiding作定语时表示主动，所以应用过去分词hidden作后置定语表被动。 ‎ ‎　　10．D。本句中否定词never及文意决定了这里应选 anything。 ‎ ‎　　11．B。四个选项从语法上讲都可以，只能从文意上进行区分，smuggling意为“走私”，是正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　12．C。固定结构be able to do sth. 意为“能够干某事”。 ‎ ‎　　13．A。习惯用语look through 意为“彻底检查”。 ‎ ‎　　14．D。“as usual”为固定短语，意为“象平常一样”。 ‎ ‎　　15．D。tell, order后面应直接接人作宾语表示告诉某人和命令某人，而用say应为say to sb. 故said为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　16．C．这里应选择一个介词构成介词短语在句中做状语。介词past 表“经过”； across 强调“从一边到另一边”；而into 表示“进入到……里面”。 根据文意across应为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　17．C。“on the job”为一常用短语。意为“执行公务”。 ‎ ‎　　18．C。因为今天是彼得最后一天上班说明明天他就要退休retire。 ‎ ‎　　19．B。根据句中否定词not 及文意应选anyone。 ‎ ‎　　20．D。本句说明这个工人回答彼得的问题之前沉默了一会儿。A选项应用a moment； C选项表示某一点时间； D选项表示一段时间或一会儿，为正确选项。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇21‎ A strange thing happened to Henry yesterday. He was on a bus and to __1__. So he stood up and rang the bell. __2__ make sure the driver heard him, he rang it twice, but the bus __3__ stop. And the conductor came and shouted __4__ him. ‎ The conductor was __5__ angry and spoke __6__ fast that Henry didn’t understand __7__. The bus stopped at the next bus and Henry got off. As he got off he heard someone said, “ I think he __8__ a foreigner.” ‎ When Henry got __9__, he told his wife about it. ‎ ‎“ __10__ times did you ring the bell?” his wife asked. ‎ ‎“ Twice,” said Henry. ‎ ‎“ Well, that’s the signal (信号) __11__ the driver __12__ on.” His wife explained, “only the conductor __13__ to ring the bell twice. That’s why the conductor __14__ so angry!” ‎ Henry nodded（点头）. “ __15__,” he said. ‎ ‎　　1. A. got off B. gets off C. get off D. get on ‎ ‎　　2. A.To B. At C. In D. with ‎ ‎　　3. A. doesn’t B. don’t C. didn’t D. wasn’t ‎ ‎　　4. A. in B. on C. of D. at ‎ ‎　　5. A. so B. as C. at D. because ‎ ‎　　6. A. so that B. that C. so D. why ‎ ‎　　7. A. words B. a word C. speech D. song ‎ ‎　　8. A. was B. isn’t C. is D. am ‎ ‎　　9. A. to home B. at home C. in home D. home ‎ ‎　　10. A. How many B. How much C. How long D. How ‎ ‎　　11. A. to B. at C. on D. for ‎ ‎　　12. A. to go B. go C. went on D. goes ‎ ‎　　13. A. allowed B. is allowed C. was allowed D. allow ‎ ‎　　14. A. got B. gets C. is getting D. gotten ‎ ‎　　15. A. I seen B. I saw C. I see D. I did ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了一位外国人在乘车时遇到的麻烦。当他准备下车时，因为着急按了两次车铃，结果引出一场误会，导致不能及时下车。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。从上下文意思可知他准备下车，故选get off。 ‎ ‎　　A。他按两次电铃的目的是希望列车员能听见。这里应用动词不定式表示目的，故选to。 ‎ ‎　　C。文章主要讲述过去发生的事情。应用一般过去时，故选didn’t. ‎ ‎　　D。shout at sb 意为“对某人大吵，大嚷”，故选at。 ‎ ‎　　A。由文章可知，列车员很生气，用副词so来修饰“angry”与下文that 构成固定搭配，即so…that…， 意思是“如此……以至……”。 ‎ ‎　　C。与上题同解。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据文意可知列车员的话乘客一句也没有听懂。故选a word。 ‎ ‎　　C。因为是直接引语，所以这里用一般现在时。故选is。 ‎ ‎　　D。got为不接物动词，可以直接接副词home，意为“到家”。 ‎ ‎　　A。分析四个选项，只有how many后可接可数名词复数 ‎ ‎　　D。这里for表示一种限定，指专门给驾驶员的信号。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据文意可知按两次车铃是提醒司机继续前进的信号，动词不定式在此作后置定语，故选to go。 ‎ ‎　　B。列车员与allow之间构成被动关系，这里应用被动语态，故选is allowed。 ‎ ‎　　A。列车员生气的情况已发生，所以用一般过去时，故选got。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据文意，这位乘客知道列车员生气的原因之后， 应说“I see.”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇22‎ Allan was worried. This was his first time to go traveling 1 . He didn’t know how to find his seat, 2 he went to the air hostess(空姐) and asked, “Could you help me? I can’t find my seat.” The air hostess showed 3 the seat and told him 4 and fasten the seat belt(系好安全带). She told Allan not to move about when the plane was going up. And she also said that Allan’s ears might feel 5 strange, but he didn’t need to 6 it because many people felt 7 that. When the plane was flying very high, Allan could stand up and walk around. He could 8 read books, newspapers or see films. The air hostess would ‎ ‎__9__ food and drinks. Allan would enjoy the flight and 10 soon. ‎ ‎　　1.A. by ship B. by air C. by car D. by bus ‎ ‎　　2.A. yet B. or C. but D. so ‎ ‎　　3.A. him B. me C. her D. he ‎ ‎　　4.A. stand up B. sleep C. to sit down D. sit down ‎ ‎　　5.A. a little B. little C. a bit of D. bit ‎ ‎　　6.A worrying B. be worried C. worry about D. worry ‎ ‎　　7.A. in B. for C. as D. like ‎ ‎　　8.A. neither B. either C. both D. also ‎ ‎　　9.A hold B. take C. bring D. carry ‎ ‎　　10. A. arrive home B. arrive to home C. get to home D. reach at home ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了Allan第一次乘飞机时的经历与感受。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．B。本文讲述了Allan第一次乘飞机时的情况, 故选by air。 ‎ ‎　　2．D。根据文意, Allan因为找不到座位, 所以他就去问空姐。这里构成因果关系，应用 so引导结果状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。Allan是男士，故选 him充当show的宾语。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。tell sb. to do sth.意思是“叫某人干某事”。故选to sit down。 ‎ ‎　　5．A。a little修饰形容词表示“有点……”。 ‎ ‎　　6．C。 need to后面应接动词原形。 worry为不接物动词，不能直接接宾语。 故选 worry about。 ‎ ‎　　7．D。like that意为“像那样”。 ‎ ‎　　8．B。固定结构either…or… , 意为“或者……或者……”。 ‎ ‎　　9．C。根据文意，空姐拿来食物和饮料给乘客, 故选bring。 ‎ ‎　　10．A。这里home是副词，其前面应用不接物动词，故选择arrive home。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇（23）‎ Whatisthebestwaytostudy?Thisisaveryimportantquestion.SomeChinesestudentsoften1veryhard2longhours.Thisisa3habit,butitisnotabetterwaytostudy.Agoodstudentmust4enoughsleep,enoughfoodandenoughrest.Every5you6totakeawalkorplaybasketballorpi What is the best way to study ? This is a very important question. Some Chinese students often 1 very hard 2 long hours. This is a 3 habit (习惯), but it is not a better way to study . A good student must 4 enough sleep, enough food and enough rest. Every 5 you 6 to take a walk or play basketball or ping-pong or sing a song. When you 7 to your studies, you’ll find yourself 8 than before and you’ll lean more. Perhaps we can 9 that learning English is like taking Chinese medicine, we mean that like Chinese medicine, the effects(效果) of your study 10 slowly but surely. Learn every day and effects will come just like Chinese medicine. ‎ ‎　　1. A. play B. study C. sleep D. think ‎ ‎　　2. A. at B. in C. for D. with ‎ ‎　　3. A. best B. better C. good D. bad ‎ ‎　　4. A. have B. do C. want D. make ‎ ‎　　5. A. month B. week C. hour D. day ‎ ‎　　6. A. want B. hope C. need D. wish ‎ ‎　　7. A. begin B. return C. go D. are ‎ ‎　　8. A. stronger B. weaker C. strong D. week ‎ ‎　　9. A. say B. guess C. talk D. know ‎ ‎　　10. A. return B. come C. give D. get ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　文章讲述了认真学习的同时，必须要注意劳逸结合。这样才有好的学习效率。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．B。下文指出这是一个好的学习习惯但不是一个好的学习方法，故选study。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。介词for常与段时间连用, 在句中作状语。 ‎ ‎　　3．C。与下半句形成转折关系，这里应选good，说明努力学习是一种好的习惯。 ‎ ‎　　4．A。一个会学习的学生必须有足够的睡眠。have意为“拥有”，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　5．D。下文take a walk, play basketball都是些日常活动，故day为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　6．C。take a walk, play basketball这些活动很有必要在学习之余进行,故选need。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。根据文意，休息之后, 应重新返回到学习上, 而不是才开始学习， 故选return。 ‎ ‎　　8．A。由句中的than可知应选比较级；根据文意，锻炼身体后, 身体应更加强壮, 故选stronger。 ‎ ‎　　9．A。say强调说的内容；guess表猜测；talk指交谈；know指知道。这里强调说的内容，故选say。 ‎ ‎　　10．B。根据最后一句“effects will come just like Chinese medicine”以及文意可知come为正确选项 ‎ ‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇24‎ Mr.Greenwasillandwenttothehospital.Adoctor__1__andsaid,Well,Mr.Green,youaregoingto__2__someinjections,andyoullfeelmuchbetter.Anursewillcome__3__giveyouthefirstonethisevening,andthenyoull__4__getanotheronetomorrowevening.__5__ayoungnursecam Mr. Green was ill and went to the hospital. A doctor __1__ and said, “Well, Mr. Green, you are going to __2__ some injections, and you’ll feel much better. A nurse will come __3__ give you the first one this evening, and then you’ll __4__ get another one tomorrow evening.” __5__ a young nurse came to Mr. Green’s bed and said to him, “I ‎ am going to give you your __6__ injection now, Mr. Green. Where do you want it?” ‎ The old man was __7__. He looked at the nurse for a __8__, then he said, “__9__ has ever let me choose that before. Are you really going to let me choose now?” ‎ ‎“Yes, Mr. Green,” the nurse answered. She was in a hurry. “Where do you want it?” ‎ ‎“Well, then,” the old man answered __10__ “I want it in your left arm, please.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. looked for him B. looked him over ‎ ‎　　C. looked after him D. looked him up ‎ ‎　　2. A. get B. give C. make D. hold ‎ ‎　　3. A. so B. but C. or D. and ‎ ‎　　4. A. must B. can C. had better D. have to ‎ ‎　　5. A. In the morning B. In the afternoon ‎ ‎　　C. In the end D. In the evening ‎ ‎　　6. A. first B. one C. two D. second ‎ ‎　　7. A. confident B. surprised C. full D. hungry ‎ ‎　　8. A. hour B. minutes C. year D. moment ‎ ‎　　9. A. Somebody B. Anybody C. Nobody D. people ‎ ‎　　10. A. with a smile B. in time ‎ ‎　　C. in surprise D. with tears in his eyes ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇笑话，格林先生在医院看病时需要打点滴，当护士让他选择身体的一个部位时，他却借题发挥，选了护士的左臂。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。look for sb/sth 意为“寻找……”；look after sb 意为“照料……”；look up sb意为“看望……”；而look over sb意为“检查某人”，最贴近文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　A。医生要对格林先生进行注射，格林先生是动作的接受者，故应选get。 ‎ ‎　　D。空白部分前面I come 和后面的give形成承接关系，所以应用 and连接。 ‎ ‎　　D。must 不可以用于将来时，根据文章意思，应选have to。 ‎ ‎　　D。与上文this evening相对应，In the evening应为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　A。one 填入空白部分显得画蛇添足，根据上下文这是第一次注射,应用first。 ‎ ‎　　B。老人对护士的提问应感到surprised, 因为下文提到从来没人问过他这样的问题。 ‎ ‎　　D。对护士的提问, 老人思考了一会儿, 故应选moment。 ‎ ‎　　C。老人感到奇怪, 是因为没有人问过这样的问题, 故应选nobody。 ‎ ‎　　A。老人想捉弄一下这个小护士。按常理, 应是带着微笑取笑她, 故应选with a smile。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇25‎ Today was a very important day. France played __1__ Senegal (塞内加尔) in the opening match of the World Cup. Soccer fans were very __2__ watching the match on TV. To our great surprise, France was __3__. ‎ Today football has become very __4__ in China after a __5__ wait. “China is in the World Cup for the first time, __6__ we should support them!” Said some people. In our school many students enjoy __7__ it. My __8__ and I often go to the football field after class. ‎ This afternoon there was a __9__ football match in our school. __10__ team played against No.1 Middle School. __11__ they were all very big and strong, it was a __12__ game between the two teams with the result 0-0 last time. Today our school played much __13__. ‎ In the first half of the match __14__ team kicked a goal, but in the second, Li Ming from our school kicked a goal. We won 1-0, at last. I’m so __15__. I can’t get to sleep tonight. ‎ ‎　　1. A. with B. against C. to D. at ‎ ‎　　2. A. good at B. pleased to C. interested in D. boring in ‎ ‎　　3. A. beaten B. knocked C. fought D. hit ‎ ‎　　4. A. welcome B. popular C. useful D. usual ‎ ‎　　5. A. 44-day B. 44-week C. 44-month D. 44-year ‎ ‎　　6. A. or B. but C. so D. yet ‎ ‎　　7. A. buying B. playing C. drinking D. looking ‎ ‎　　8. A. students B. teachers C. classmates D parents ‎ ‎　　9. A. happy B. wonderful C. funny D. famous ‎ ‎　　10. A. Their B. Her C. Your D. Our ‎ ‎　　11. A. Because B. And C. As D. Though ‎ ‎　　12. A. mistake B. luck C. draw D. game ‎ ‎　　13. A. better B. well C. vest D. worse ‎ ‎　　14. A. neither B. either C. both D. none ‎ ‎　　15. A. lucky B. pleased C. unhappy D. worried ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本人介绍了世界杯首场比赛的结果，表达了中国队进入世界杯引起的兴奋之情，讲述了足球在中国的发展情况。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。固定结构 play against sb. 意为“与……进行比赛”。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。be good at 意为“擅长于……”；be pleased to 后面应接动词原形；D项说法和意思都不对；be interested in 意为“对……感兴趣”，符合文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。beat sb. 意为“击败某人”，符合文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。事实说明，足球在中国越来越流行，故选popular。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。大家都知道，这次等待的时间应为44年，故选 D。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。两句的意思形成因果关系，所以应用so来引导结果状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。play football 意为“踢足球”。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。按常理，放学后，和我一起踢足球的应是同学，故选classmates。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。通读下文，这是一场紧张但以我方胜利而告终的足球赛，比赛刺激精彩，应选wonderful 。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。根据文章，比赛是在我们城队和另一支城队之间进行，故选our。 ‎ ‎　　11. D。分析句子，前一句是后一句的让步状语从句，故应选Though。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。根据上半场0：0的比分可知上半场以平局告终，故选draw 。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。从文中可知，我对我队的表现非常满意，且much常用来修饰比较级，故选择better。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。neither表示两者都不，either表示两者中的任意一个，both表示两者都，none表示三者或三者以上都不。上半场双方没有进球，故选neither。. ‎ ‎　　15. B。我队获胜，我当然很高兴，故选pleased。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇26‎ The computer is fast, and never makes a mistake, while people are too slow, and full of mistakes sometimes. That’s __1__ people often say when __2__ talk about computers. For over a quarter of a century, scientists have been __3__ better and better computers. Now a computer can __4__ a lot of __5__ jobs wonderfully. It is __6__ used in factories, hospitals, post offices and airports. A computer can report, decide and control in almost __7__ field. Many computer scientists are thinking of __8__ the computer “think” like a man. With the help of a person, a computer can __9__ pictures, write music, talk with people, play chess, recognize voices, translate languages and so on. Perhaps computers will __10__ really think and feel. Do you think the people will be afraid __11__ they find that the computer is too clever to listen to and serve the people? No, people will __12__ better use of the computers in __13__ future. Man is __14__ the master of the computer. The computer works only __15__ the help of man. It cannot take the place of man. ‎ ‎　　1. A. that B. what C. how D. why ‎ ‎　　2. A. we B. they C. you D. people ‎ ‎　　3. A. loving B. taking C. making D. thinking ‎ ‎　　4. A. have B. get C. do D. offer ‎ ‎　　5. A. everyday B. every day C. each day D. some day ‎ ‎　　6. A. widely B. wide C. great D. deeply ‎ ‎　　7. A. either B. all C. both D. every ‎ ‎　　8. A. producing B. ordering C. making D. building ‎ ‎　　9. A. take B. look at C. draw D. put ‎ ‎　　10.A. one day B. a day C. any day D. the other day ‎ ‎　　11.A. when B. that C. how D. while ‎ ‎　　12.A. chose B. get C. take D. make ‎ ‎　　13.A. a B. an C. the D. / ‎ ‎　　14.A. often B. never C. always D. sometimes ‎ ‎　　15.A. with B. under C. by D. for ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了电脑在人类工作与生活等方面起着越来越大的作用，并告诉人们不必担心不断发展的电脑会威胁人类的安全，因为它永远处于人类的操纵之中。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．B。这里需要一个表语从句的引导词，并在从句中作say的宾语，代替上文的内容。 what从意思和语法上都合乎文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　2．B。替代前文的people应用they。 ‎ ‎　　3．C。科学家们一直在制造越来越好的电脑，故选择making。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。do a lot of jobs意思为“干许多事情”。其余三个动词皆不合文意。 ‎ ‎　　5．A。词组every day意思为“每天”；some day指将来的“某一天”；形容词everyday意思为“日常的”，合乎文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　6．A。这里应选择一个副词，表示电脑应用的程度。widely意思是“广泛地”，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　7．D。下文中的field是可数名词单数形式，意思为“领域”，而either指两者中的任意一个，不合文意，故选择every。 ‎ ‎　　8．C。make作使役动词时，后面应接不定式的复合结构，且不定式省去to，即make sb. do sth.，故选择make。 ‎ ‎　　9．C。draw意思为“画图”，合乎文意。 ‎ ‎　　10．A。the other day指过去的某一天；one day既可指过去的某一天，也可指将来的某一天。这里讲的是将来的设想，故选one day。 ‎ ‎　　11．A。这是一个时间状语从句。while引导的从句中的动词必须是延续性动词；when引导的从句中，动词既可以是延续性动词，也可以是瞬间动词，故when为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　12．D。固定结构make use of意思为“利用”。 ‎ ‎　　13．C。in the future意思为“将来”，为正确选项。而in future意思为“今后”，不合文意。 ‎ ‎　　14．C。根据上下文，电脑是不可能取代人类的，而人类应永远是电脑的操纵者，故选always。 ‎ ‎　　15．A。固定结构with the help of意思为“在……的帮助下”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇27‎ It was very cold that day. It was __1__ heavily and the ground was covered with __2__ snow. The shepherd thought it was dangerous to __3__ the hill and it was difficult for the sheep to find some __4__ there. So he decided to stay in the __5__ room. He put some hay(干草) in a pen(围栏) __6__ the sheep could eat it when they were __7__. The dog, who felt cold outside, lay on the __8__ hay and soon went to sleep. ‎ ‎ At noon the sheep wanted to eat the hay. They were __9__ afraid of the dog and __10__ could get close to it. At last the __11__ sheep came to the hay. Before he started to eat, the dog heard it and opened his eyes. He ‎ barked(吠) loudly to __12__ him. The sheep ran away __13__. Looking at the unnatural(不近人情的) dog, the sheep began to talk __14__. ‎ ‎ “What a selfish(自私的) dog!” said one of the sheep. “He cannot eat the hay, and yet refuses to __15__ those who can to eat!” ‎ ‎　　1. A. raining B. snowing C. blowing D. shining ‎ ‎　　2. A. thick B. thin C. beautiful D. big ‎ ‎　　3. A. play on B. live on C. climb up D. go to ‎ ‎　　4. A. cake B. grass C. fruit D. vegetables ‎ ‎　　5. A. cold B. cool C. hot D. warm ‎ ‎　　6. A. in order to B. so as to C. so that D. in order ‎ ‎　　7. A. hungry B. sick C. full D. free ‎ ‎　　8. A. hard B. soft C. thin D. wet ‎ ‎　　9. A. both B. either C. all D. neither ‎ ‎　　10. A. none B. neither C. any D. some ‎ ‎　　11. A. smallest B. youngest C. weakest D. strongest ‎ ‎　　12. A. meet B. greet C. warn D. receive ‎ ‎　　13. A. easily B. happily C. sadly D. quickly ‎ ‎　　14. A. angrily B. happily C. quietly D. politely ‎ ‎　　15. A. let B. ask C. forget D. allow ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本篇是一个寓言故事，说的是一只牧羊犬，因为天冷，就睡在牧羊人给羊吃的干草上。结果，羊吃不着草，感到非常生气，他们认为狗太自私，自己又不能吃草，还不让能吃草的吃。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。从下文可知天是在下雪。 ‎ ‎　　A。上文说天在下着大雪，所以地上应该被覆盖着“厚厚的”雪。 ‎ ‎　　C。可能有同学会选go to the hill，但比较climb up the hill，后者更符合常理。意为“在这种天气下爬上山是很危险的。” ‎ ‎　　B。根据常理，羊在那儿也很难找到草。 ‎ ‎　　D。天冷，牧羊人就想呆在温暖的房间里。英语里一般不用hot room。 ‎ ‎　　C。后面是一个完整的句子，所以不可以用in order to或so as to。so that意为“以便”，后面得跟一个完整的句子。 ‎ ‎　　A。全句意为“牧羊人把干草放在围栏里以便羊在饿的时候能吃”。 ‎ ‎　　B。躺在软草上，用soft最恰当。 ‎ ‎　　C。羊都很害怕狗。“三者以上的都”只有用all。 ‎ ‎　　A。没有一只羊能接近它。 ‎ ‎　　D。最终也只有最强壮的羊敢上前去。小的、弱的哪有这个胆量？ ‎ ‎　　C。狗大声叫，是想警告羊。绝不是去问候它。 ‎ ‎　　D。羊只好赶紧离开，其他副词都不妥当。 ‎ ‎　　A。不敢去吃草，只好私下里很气愤地谈论。 ‎ ‎　　D。本句可能有同学会选let，但注意后面有to eat ，没有let sb. to do sth的说法.，但是有allow sb to do sth.，意为“但还不允许能吃的去吃（草）。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇28‎ Mr. and Mrs. Harris had always spent their summer holidays in a small hotel at the seaside near their hometown. One year, however(然而) , Mr. Harris made a lot of 1 in his business, 2 they decided to go to a foreign country and stay at a really good 3 . ‎ They flew to Rome, and 4 at a 5-star hotel late in the evening. They thought they would have to go to bed ‎ hungry, because in that 5 hotel where they had been used to stay in the past, no meals were served (供应) 6 seven in the evening. They were 7 to be told that the hotel served dinner until ten. ‎ ‎“Then what are the times 8 meals?” asked Mrs. Harris. ‎ ‎“Well, madam, we serve breakfast from seven to eleven, lunch from twelve to three, 9 from four to five, and dinner from six to ten.” ‎ ‎“But that hardly 10 any time for us to see the city!” said Mrs. Harris. ‎ ‎　　1. A. mistakes B. time C. friends D. money ‎ ‎　　2. A. but B. so C. though D. yet ‎ ‎　　3. A. hotel B. place C. city D. restaurant ‎ ‎　　4. A. stayed B. got C. arrived D. reached ‎ ‎　　5. A. small B. big C. foreign D. good ‎ ‎　　6. A. on B. after C. during D. until ‎ ‎　　7. A. tired B. interested C. surprised D. worried ‎ ‎　　8. A. with B. on C. at D. of ‎ ‎　　9. A. drink B. tea C. beer D. food ‎ ‎　　10. A. takes B. does C. has D. leaves ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　哈里斯很少住星级宾馆，一次在罗马旅行时住进了一家五星级宾馆，因为对宾馆提供的服务不胜了解，结果闹出了笑话。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．D。根据下文，哈里斯夫妇出国旅游并住进高级宾馆，说明他们赚了很多钱。故选money。 ‎ ‎　　2．B。made a lot of money与下文go to a foreign country构成因果关系， 故选so。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。与下文他们住进a 5-star hotel相对应，这里应选择hotel。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。表示到达目的地，reach可直接接宾语， get后应加介词to， arrive为不接物动词，后应加介词in或at才能接宾语，所以arrive为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　5．A。根据文章的第一句，以前他都是住的small hotel，这里应选small。 ‎ ‎　　6．B。on和during都不能与seven连用。他们估计要挨饿，说明在以前住的宾馆里7点以后不可能有饭菜供应。故应选择after。 ‎ ‎　　7．C。有人告知饭菜供应会持续到十点时，他们理应感到surprised。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。of常用来表示所有关系，the times of the meals表示“每顿饭的供应时间”。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。根据西方人的生活习性，宾馆一般不会在一段时间只供应啤酒，下午喝茶比较合乎常理。故选tea。 ‎ ‎　　10．D。哈里斯以为从早到晚都得在吃饭或喝茶，几乎没有剩余时间观光旅游了，leave表示“剩下，遗留”，为正确选项。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇29‎ Friends are very important in our everyday life. Everyone 1__ friends. We all like to feel close to someone. __2__ is nice to have a friend to talk, laugh, and do things with. 3 , sometimes we need to be alone. We don’t always want people 4 . But we would feel lonely if we __5__ had a friend. ‎ No two people are 6 . Friends 7 don’t get on well. That doesn’t mean that they no longer like each other. Most of the time they will make up (言归于好) and become 8 again. ‎ Sometimes friends move away. Then we feel very 9 . We miss them very much, but we can 10 them and write to them. And we can __11 new friends. It is encouraging to find out how much we like new people when we get to know them. ‎ There’s more good news for people who have friends. They live __12__ than people who don’t. Why? Friends can make us feel happy. __13__ happy helps you stay well. Or it could be just done that someone cares. If some one cares about you, you take 14 care of 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. loves B. hates C. needs D. becomes ‎ ‎　　2. A. It B. He C. There D. Someone ‎ ‎　　3. A. Hardly B. Nearly C. Suddenly D. Certainly ‎ ‎　　4. A. alone B. away C. all over D. around ‎ ‎　　5. A. ever B. never C. just D. really ‎ ‎　　6. A. friendly B. kind C. just the same D. quite different ‎ ‎　　7 A. always B. sometimes C. often D. usually ‎ ‎　　8. A. friendly B. good C. pleased D. friends ‎ ‎　　9. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. alone ‎ ‎　　10. A. call B. ask C. tell D. talk with ‎ ‎　　11. A. look for B. find C. make D. know ‎ ‎　　12. A. longer B. shorter C. slower D. faster ‎ ‎　　13. A. Smelling B. Being C. Sounding D. Making ‎ ‎　　14. A. less B. better C. little D. no ‎ ‎　　15. A. you B. your C. yours D. yourself ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了朋友在人一生中扮演着重要角色。和朋友一起谈天说地，一起做事，不仅使我们远离寂寞，增添生活情趣，而且也使我们的身心更加健康。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．C。根据上文，friends are very important. 可以知道每个人都需要朋友, 故选needs。 ‎ ‎　　2．A。这里应用it做形式主语，代替后面真正的主语，即to have a friend。 ‎ ‎　　3．D。一方面我们需要和朋友在一起，另一方面我们也需要独处，根据句意，应该选certainly。 ‎ ‎　　4．D。根据上一句we need to be alone，可以知道我们有时也不希望周围一直有人相伴，故选around。 ‎ ‎　　5．B。根据句意，没有朋友的情况下会感到孤独。故选never。 ‎ ‎　　6．C。根据句意，世界上没有两个人是相同的，故选just the same。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。既然人与人之间总有不同之处，所以朋友有时也会有矛盾,故选sometimes。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。根据上半句they will make up可以知道产生分歧的朋友也会和好如初。故选friends。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。根据语境，朋友离开应是很难过的事情。故选sad。 ‎ ‎　　10．A。根据常识，思念朋友时，我们可以通过打电话和写信来和朋友联络, 故选call。 ‎ ‎　　11．C。make friends为固定结构，意思是“交朋友”。 ‎ ‎　　12．A。根据上句中“good news”, 可以知道这里应该是长寿，又因为句中有than, 可以知道应填比较级，故选longer。 ‎ ‎　　13．B。根据题意，心情好，有助于身体健康。这里用动名词短语充当主语，happy是形容词，前面应添上be动词，故选 being 。 ‎ ‎　　14．B。根据题意，如果别人关心你，你就会加倍珍惜自己，故选better。 ‎ ‎　　15．D。根据题意，这里表示“自己照顾自己“，故选yourself 。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇30‎ Suppose(假设) you are going to Boston, and you 1 the city ‎ before. If someone 2 you about the interesting places in the city, you __3 to get some ideas of what you will see. But don’t have a 4__ idea of where these places are or of how to find 5 . However, 6__ someone has a map of the city and 7 you the main roads and buildings, you may say, “ Oh, now I see . I can find my way with 8__ trouble at all ”. Working in math is somewhat（有点儿） like trying to find your way 9 a new city. Perhaps the words may tell you some information and you have 10 it, but you can’t see any clear road 11 the answers. ‎ Maybe you 12 a kind of map of the main roads in maths 13__ you find your way. Explore（探究）what lies in maths, and 14 to find ‎ the main roads. They will 15 you to the answer. If you can find the “map”, the maths problems will be easily worked out. ‎ ‎　　1. A. are going to visit B. once visited ‎ ‎　　C. have never visited D. have ever visit ‎ ‎　　2. A. answers B. shows C. meets D. tells ‎ ‎　　3. A. begin B. like C. learn D. refuse ‎ ‎　　4. A. clever B. clear C. strange D. wrong ‎ ‎　　5. A. someone B. Boston C. them D. it ‎ ‎　　6. A. if B. though C. whether D. since ‎ ‎　　7. A. helps B. gives C. passes D. shows ‎ ‎　　8. A. not B. no C. some D. much ‎ ‎　　9. A. of B. to C. in D around ‎ ‎　　10. A. thought over B. heard about ‎ ‎　　C. written down D talked with ‎ ‎　　11. A. with B. for C. of D to ‎ ‎　　12. A. need to have B. don’t need C needn’t D. in need of ‎ ‎　　13. A. help B. to help C. helps D help with ‎ ‎　　14. A. try your best B. take your place ‎ ‎　　C. look up D walk on ‎ ‎　　15. A. keep B. send C. lead D. ask ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　文章以在陌生的城市找名胜为例，说明了解决数学最重要的是先找出一条通往答案的路径。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．C。下文表明：你要去的是一个一点儿都不熟悉的城市，说明以前没有去过。故选have never visited。 ‎ ‎　　2．D。show意为“带领某人参观某地”或“向某人展示某物”；tell sb. about sth. 意为“告诉某人关于……的情况。根据下文可知tell为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。文章表明：听了别人的介绍后，你对城市的名胜开始有了一些初步的印象。故选begin。 ‎ ‎　　4．B。根据文意，你对名胜的概况只是听说而已，对名胜的具体位置及如何找到所指的名胜不太清楚。故选clear。 ‎ ‎　　5．C。指代上文出现的interesting places应用them。 ‎ ‎　　6．A。根据句意，前半句是后半句的条件状语从句，应用if引导。 ‎ ‎　　7．D。show sb. sth.意为“把……给某人看”，合符文意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　8．B。根据地图上的位置，你会毫不费力地找到想去的地方。故选no。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。本文是讲如何在一个陌生的城市里找到目的地，而不是找去某个城市的路。故选in。 ‎ ‎　　10．A。做数学题时，你肯定要对题目中所给的信息进行思考。故应选thought over。 ‎ ‎　　11．D。the road to the answers意为“解决问题的路径”，to为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　12．A。根据上文列举的根据地图找名胜的例子可知，做数学题目也需要“地图”。故应选need to have。 ‎ ‎　　13．B。这里应该用动词不定式to help you find your way作目的状语才合符句意。 ‎ ‎　　14．A。try one’s best to do sth.意思是“尽某人最大的努力去做某事”，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　15．C。“lead sb. to某地”意思是“引导某人到达某地”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇31‎ Several years ago I studied in a university in the biggest city in our country. It’s beautiful but it’s hot in __1__. So I usually returned to my hometown when my __2__ began. It is not big, but it’s cool and quiet. I could __3__ in the ‎ daytime and have a good sleep at night. ‎ One day I had some __4__ to solve. But I didn’t take the dictionaries home. My father told me Charlie, one of my __5__, had a good library. I went to his house at once. We didn’t see each other after I __6__ middle school. At first he didn’t recognize me. He __7__ me up and down. And then he called out, “Oh, dear! It’s you, Fred!” ‎ Of course we were __8__ to meet each other again and talked a lot about our schoolmates and __9__. Later on he showed me around his library. It wasn’t big but there were a lot of nice books in it. And the dictionaries I __10__ were in them too. At last I said, “__11__ you lend some dictionaries to me, please?” ‎ ‎“I’m sorry I don’t lend any books to __12__,” said the young man. ‎ ‎“Are you afraid I’ll __13__ them?” ‎ ‎“No, I’m not. I’m afraid you won’t __14__ them to me. Look! All the books are not __15__, but borrowed!” ‎ ‎　　A. spring B. summer C. autumn D. winter ‎ ‎　　A. birthday B. Saturday C. Sunday D. holiday ‎ ‎　　A. study B. play C. rest D. run ‎ ‎　　A. words B. sentences C. problems D. stories ‎ ‎　　A. brothers B. sisters C. aunts D. classmates ‎ ‎　　A. finished B. heard C. saw D. met ‎ ‎　　A. lifted B. carried C. looked D. pulled ‎ ‎　　A. angry B. happy C. worried D. sad ‎ ‎　　A. doctors B. teachers C. workers D. drivers ‎ ‎　　A. looked for B. read C. wrote D. looked at ‎ ‎　　A. Need B. Must C. May D. Can ‎ ‎　　A. other B. the other C. others D. another ‎ ‎　　A. lose B. sell C. throw D. know ‎ ‎　　A. pay B. return C. use D. look after ‎ ‎　　A. made B. picked C. won D. bought ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文主要讲了Charlie家里有许多藏书，却没有一本是自己买的，所以他从不借书给别人，因为他怕别人都和他一样。本题的不少答案只从缺空所在句子的语意和语法是无法确定的，解题是要联系上下文及一般常识进行推理。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。hot应该指的是夏天的天气情况。 ‎ ‎　　D。大学生暑假回家度假。 ‎ ‎　　A。学生暑假应该不忘学习。 ‎ ‎　　C。solve problems意为“解决问题”。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据下文可得知。 ‎ ‎　　A。finish middle school表示“中学毕业”。 ‎ ‎　　C。look sb. up and down表示“上下打量某人”，这时look用作及物动词。 ‎ ‎　　B。老同学相见自然是高兴。 ‎ ‎　　B。同学之间谈论的主要对象一般应该是同学和老师。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据上下文得知“我”正在寻找一本字典。 ‎ ‎　　D。这里指征求别人的意见，故用can。 ‎ ‎　　C。泛指其他人，故用复数。 ‎ ‎　　A。“我”以为他怕我把书弄丢，所以不借。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据下文得知他的书都是借的，所以他不愿借给我，怕我也象他一样借书不还。 ‎ ‎　　D。这些书都不是买的，而是借的。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇32‎ Mr. Wang teaches English in a middle school. He likes his work very much. He wanted 1 a teacher even when he was a young boy. ‎ There are six classes in a school day at Mr. Wang’s middle school. Mr. Wang teachers five of these six classes. 2 his "free" hour from 2 to 3 in the afternoon, Mr. Wang 3 meet with parents, check students’ homework and 4 many other things. So Mr. Wang works hard from the moment he gets to school early in the morning until he leaves for home late in the afternoon, and his "free" hour is not free at all. ‎ In his English lesson, Mr. Wang sometimes teaches poems (诗). He likes poems very much, and he likes Li Bai’s poems 5 of all. ‎ In his fifth class today, Mr. Wang taught a poem. He wrote the poem on the blackboard and read it. As soon as he finished 6 the poem, the students began to ask questions. He answered all the questions. Then he asked his students to talk about the poem. 7 one wanted to stop when the bell rang. ‎ ‎ 8 home, Mr. Wang thought about the fifth class. He was happy about what he did as a teacher. Every one of his students 9 the poem. When they started to talk, they forgot about the time. He did not have to make them 10 . He only had to answer their questions and help them understand the poem. ‎ ‎　　1. A. was B. being C. to be D. be ‎ ‎　　2. A. In B. At C. To D. On ‎ ‎　　3. A. has to B. has C. able to D. will ‎ ‎　　4. A. take care for B. care of ‎ ‎　　C. take care of D. be careful of ‎ ‎　　5. A. better B. good C. well D. best ‎ ‎　　6. A. reading B. to read C. read D. doing ‎ ‎　　7. A. Not B. No C. Have no D. Any ‎ ‎　　8. A. By the way B. To his way ‎ ‎　　C. On his way D. In the way ‎ ‎　　9. A. liked B. asked C. had D. wanted ‎ ‎　　10. A. learning B. to learn ‎ ‎　　C. learn D. leant ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　Mr. Wang是一位英语老师，他热心于教育，忙于教学，工作负责，课堂上善于启发学生回答问题，讨论问题。即使在回家的途中，仍沉浸在课堂活跃气氛的回忆中。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。语法结构 want后面跟不定式。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。时间点后面跟介词at。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。has to意思是“不得不，必须”。这里引出所要做的事。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。固定短语。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。此句后面有 at all这一比较范围，故用最高级。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。finish后面跟动名词。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。课堂上学生们积极发言，没有人想停下来。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。on one’s way home意思是“在回家的路上”。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。学生受老师的影响也开始爱诗歌了。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。语法结构：make sb.do sth。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇33‎ Many animals use some kinds of “language”. They use signals(信号) and the signals have meanings. For example, __1 a bee has found some food, it goes 2 its home. 3 is difficult for a bee to tell __4 bees where the food is speaking to them, but it can do a little dancing. This tells the bees where the food is and 5 it is. ‎ Some animals show 6 they feel by making sounds. It is not difficult to tell if a dog is angry because it barks. Birds make several different sounds and 7 has its meaning. Sometimes we humans make sounds in the same way. We make sounds like “Oh” to 8 how we feel about __9__ or we 10 something on our feet. ‎ We humans have languages. We have words. These words have meaning of things, action, feeling or ideas. We are able to __11__ each other information, to tell other people 12 we think or we feel. By writing down words, we can remember what has happened or 13 messages to people far away. ‎ Languages, like people, live and die. If a language is not used by people, it is called a dead language. This language cannot live and grow because 14 speaks it. ‎ A living language, of course, is often spoken by people today. It grows and changes with time. New words are created, and some old words have 15 meanings. ‎ ‎　　1. A. because B. since C. when D. as ‎ ‎　　2. A. out of B. back from C. away from D. back to ‎ ‎　　3. A. It B. This C. That D. He ‎ ‎　　4. A. each other B. another C. the other D. others ‎ ‎　　5. A. how long B. how far away C. how many D. how old ‎ ‎　　6. A. why B. which C. how D. what ‎ ‎　　7. A. each B. every C. all D. some ‎ ‎　　8. A. show B. say C. talk D. speak ‎ ‎　　9. A. everything B. something C. nothing D. anything ‎ ‎　　10. A. put B. drop C. fall D. set ‎ ‎　　11. A. give B. put C. show D. take ‎ ‎　　12. A. that B. which C. what D. why ‎ ‎　　13. A. send B. bring C. push D. get ‎ ‎　　14. A. someone B. no one C. anyone D. everyone ‎ ‎　　15. A. new B. right C. real D. good ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这则短文讲述的是语言的重要性。无论是何种语言，只要不使用，它将死亡。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．C。表示”当……的时候”。 ‎ ‎　　2．D。蜜蜂发现食物会返回蜂窝，通知其它蜜蜂。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。形式主语。 ‎ ‎　　4．C。the other bees其它的蜜蜂。 ‎ ‎　　5．B。蜜蜂通过跳舞告诉同伴物源有多远。 ‎ ‎　　6．C。用how作状语修饰feel。 ‎ ‎　　7．A。根据谓语动词has应选each.。each指代的是可数名词sound，所以不能用all或some，而every是形容词，不能做主语。 ‎ ‎　　8．A。用语言来表示自己的感觉，故选show。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。 ‎ ‎　　10．B。ouch表示疼痛，故推测是东西砸到了脚上。Fall是不及物动词，故不选。 ‎ ‎　　11．A。 ‎ ‎　　12．C。think为及物动词，这里what做think宾语。 ‎ ‎　　13．A。send messages为固定搭配，表示“发送信息”。 ‎ ‎　　14．B。根据文意，一种语言如果没人使用，就会灭亡。 ‎ ‎　　15．A。旧词新意。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇34‎ It’s never easy to admit(承认) you are in the wrong. We all __1__ to know the art of apology. Think how often ‎ you’ve done wrong. Then count how many __2__ you’ve expressed clearly you were __3__. You can’t go to bed with an easy mind if you do __4__ about it. ‎ A doctor friend, Mr. Lied, told me about a man who came to him with different kinds of signs: headaches, heart __5__ and insomnia (失眠). __6__ some careful exams, Mr. Lied found nothing ___7__ with him and said, “If you don’t tell me what’s __8__ you, I can’t help you.” The man admitted he was cheating his brother of his inheritance(遗产). Then and there the __9__ doctor __10__ the man write to his brother and __11__ his money. As soon as the __12__ was put into the post box, the man suddenly cried. “Thank you,” he said to the doctor, “I think I’ve got __13__.” ‎ An apology can not only save a broken relationship(关系) but also make it __14__. If you can think of someone who should be __15__ an apology from you. Do something about it right now. ‎ ‎　　1. A. decide B. have C. need D. try ‎ ‎　　2. A. mistakes B. people C. ways D. times ‎ ‎　　3. A. sorry B. weak C. sad D. wrong ‎ ‎　　4. A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎ ‎　　5. A. trouble B. matter C. illness D. problem ‎ ‎　　6. A. Before B. After C. Till D. Since ‎ ‎　　7. A. well B. wrong C. good D. bad ‎ ‎　　8. A. hurling B. changing C. touching D. worrying ‎ ‎　　9. A. clever B. silly C. good D. kind ‎ ‎　　10. A. made B. helped C. saw D. let ‎ ‎　　11. A. returned B. gave C. kept D. paid ‎ ‎　　12. A. paper B. box C. money D. letter ‎ ‎　　13. A. better B. well C. sick D. worse ‎ ‎　　14. A. never B. worse C. stronger D. harder ‎ ‎　　15. A. given B. received C. known D. forgotten ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇关于学会如何道歉的短文，它提醒人们要学会认识自己的错误，并能够为自己的错误道歉。做不到这一点会造成自己心理上的压力，甚至带来疾病。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1. C。这里指的是人们有必要了解道歉这门艺术。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。times这里表示次数。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。根据上文，承认错误决非易事，道歉更是一门艺术，此时作者是建议读者计算一下有过多少次是能清楚地表达自己的歉意的，所以选sorry。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。如果你对自己的错误什么也不去做, 你睡觉也不会睡得好。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。这里表示心脏有毛病。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。nothing wrong 表明这个人生理没有任何问题, 看下文就可以知道这一点。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。这是一名很聪明的医生, 所以他提出了下面一个方法。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。made 具有强制性的意思, 故选let sb. do sth..好。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。上文得知这人骗了哥哥的遗产, 所以还了他所欠的钱才能治好他的心病。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。根据后面的post box可以得知这里是指寄出了那封信。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。这个人其实没有病, 所以在解决了心理问题后,他一下子觉得好了, 而不是好转, 故选well 而不是better。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。道歉不仅可以挽救破碎的人际关系, 还可以增强人与人之间的联系。harder指的是具体事物的“坚硬”, 故此处不当。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。give sb. an apology意为“向某人道歉”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇35‎ Mr. and Mrs. king have lived in our town for nearly twenty years. They have a bookshop by the bus station. They’re __1__ to everybody and have a lot of friends. They often __2__ the poor students and sell them some books cheaply. So there’re many young men in their shop. Of course people __3__ them and their friends often call on (拜访) them and __4__ them. We can always hear their rooms are full of __5__ and quarrel. ‎ It was a Friday evening. Mr. and Mrs. King were going to have a picnic on the island the next __6__. It was a little far from our town. So they had to __7__ earlier than usual to catch a six o’clock train. After __8__ a few friends came to see them while they were cooking some __9__ and drinks for the picnic. Mr. king and his wife had to stop __10__ them. They talked a lot and few of them looked at the __11__ on the wall. Mr. and Mrs. King were anxious (焦急) but they couldn’t tell the visitors about it. The woman thought for a few __12__ and had an idea. She said to her __13__, “Oh, it’s eleven o’clock! You’d better stop talking, dear! Our guests are anxious to __14__! ‎ Mr. king heard this and stood up and said __15__ to the visitors and they left soon. ‎ ‎　　1. A. had B. polite C. cold D. careful; ‎ ‎　　2. A. help B. hurt C. hit D. watch ‎ ‎　　3. A. know B. understand C. meet D. like ‎ ‎　　4. A. play with B. fight with C. talk with D. catch up with ‎ ‎　　5. A. cry B. shout C. noise D. laugh ‎ ‎　　6. A. morning B. afternoon C. evening D. laugh ‎ ‎　　7. A. go to work B. get up C. go to sleep D. open the shop ‎ ‎　　8. A. breakfast B. lunch C. supper D. meal ‎ ‎　　9. A. clothes B. bags C. books D. food ‎ ‎　　10. A. receive B. to receive C. receiving D. to accept ‎ ‎　　11. A. phone B. photo C. clock D. picture ‎ ‎　　12. A. minutes B. days C. weeks D. months ‎ ‎　　13. A. visitor B. husband C. brother D. father ‎ ‎　　14. A. go home B. go to bed C. go shopping D. have a rest ‎ ‎　　15. A. hello B. goodbye C. sorry D. nothing ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一则委婉地谢绝客人的故事, 这也是我们平时很容易遇到的事。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据下文have a lot of friends可以推断他们待人友好(friendly)。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。他们帮助穷困的学生。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。根据上文得知，别人都很喜欢他们。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。talk with 表示聊天。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。他们的家里总是充满了欢笑。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。根据下文他们要赶早班车得知是早上。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。为了赶早班车他们不得不早起，故选get up。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。这是一个星期五的晚上，故是晚饭后。 ‎ ‎　　9. D。他们正在为第二天的野餐准备食物和饮料。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。停下（手中的事）来做某事，用stop to do sth.，另外receive sb. 表示接待某人。 ‎ ‎　　11. C。他聊得很尽兴，以致于忘了时间，也就是忘了看墙上的钟。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。这里指很短的时间。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。表示时间已经不早了，客人们肯定着急要回家了。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。丈夫向客人道歉，表示是自己忘了时间，这样客人就不会尴尬了。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇36‎ Martin Henfield talks about some of his experience(经历) as a twin: when we were small my mother dressed us __1_ the same clothes. That was bad enough and we didn’t like it. But we went on our first camping trip, it was even __2__. We were only ten years old, and while __3_ went into their sleeping bags for the _4__, we were not happy to snuggle(偎依) inside a double sleeping bag my mother made for us. ‎ At school our classmates __5__us Henfield One and Henfield Two, so people ___6__ even see our difference according to our initials because __7__ of us were M.O. It was only when I went to _8___ and began to have my own friends that I started to feel my own freedom of identity（身份）. ‎ Before I went to college, during my secondary school __9__, I __10__ to a job on a building site. My twin brother, Mike Henfield, didn’t work. One day I asked my boss, “Can I have a week _11__?” “Certainly,” he said, “but you won’t have the job when you 12__ back.” I didn’t want to __13__ the job. So on Monday morning, Mike went there in my _14__, jacket and hat and he worked for me for one week __15___ of them knew the difference. ‎ ‎　　1. A. in B. for C. on D. with ‎ ‎　　2. A. badder B. worse C. good D. better ‎ ‎　　3. A. all boys B. another boy ‎ ‎　　C. all the other boys D. all the boys ‎ ‎　　4. A. day B. holiday C. night D. mid-night ‎ ‎　　5. A. called B. knew C. told D. made ‎ ‎　　6. A. didn’t B. needn’t C. mustn’t D. couldn’t ‎ ‎　　7. A. very B. each C. both D. all ‎ ‎　　8. A. middle school B. college C. high school D. school ‎ ‎　　9. A. holidays B. week C. weekend D. holiday ‎ ‎　　10. A. received B. got C. find D. made ‎ ‎　　11. A. off B. free C. on D. back ‎ ‎　　12. A. came B. will get C. got D. are ‎ ‎　　13. A. miss B. lose C. lost D. losing ‎ ‎　　14. A. coat B. shirt C. shoes D. trousers ‎ ‎　　15. A. None B. Nobody C. All D. Each ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一则关于双胞胎的故事, 说明了作为双胞胎既有他们苦恼的一面, 也有乐趣的一面. 在做这则完型填空时, 只要抓住双胞胎非常相像这一特点, 就很容易理解其中发生的事情了。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1. A。“给某人穿（衣服）”应为dress sb. in。 ‎ ‎　　2. B 根据下文可知野营中的情况比平时更糟糕.。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。the other加名词复数表示“剩余的所有的人”。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。睡袋应用于夜间。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。“称呼某人……”用call sb. …。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。根据后面的系动词were, 应用both表复数。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。根据上下文可知, 直到大学, 这种情况才有所改变。 ‎ ‎　　9. D。指中学生涯的最后一个假期。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。“找到一份工作”可用get/find a job, 但此处应用过去时。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。have a week off 休息一个星期。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。只有D项时态正确。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。 ‎ ‎　　14. D。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。没有一个人看出这时双胞胎交换了一下。B项不可带of。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇37‎ Have you ever seen the advertisement: Learn a foreign language in six weeks, 1 give your money back? Of course, it 2 happens quite like that. The only language 3 to learn is the mother language. And think 4 practice is needed for that. Before the Second World War people usually learned a foreign language 5 the literature(文学) of the country. Now most people want to 6 a foreign language. Every year millions of people start learning 7 . ‎ ‎ How do they do it? Some people try at home 8 books and tapes, others go to evening classes or watch TV programs. 9 they use the language only 2 or 3 times a week, learning it will 10 a long time, like language learning at school. A few people try to learn a language fast by studying for 6 or 11 hours a day. It’s much easier to learn the language in the country where it 12 . But most people are 13 to do this, and many people don’t have to do so. Machines and good books will be very 14 , but they can not do the students’ work. 15 the language is learned quickly or slowly, it is hard work. ‎ ‎　　1. A. so B. or C. and D. but ‎ ‎　　2. A. can＇t B. impossible C. never D. often ‎ ‎　　3. A. easily B. difficult C. able D. easy ‎ ‎　　4. A. how much B. how long C. how fast D. how many ‎ ‎　　5. A. studied B. to study C. studying D. study ‎ ‎　　6. A. talk B. tell C. speak D. say ‎ ‎　　7. A. them B. this C. that D. it ‎ ‎　　8. A. without B. with C. in D. by ‎ ‎　　9. A. If B. When C. Since D. Until ‎ ‎　　10. A. spend B. use C. take D. cost ‎ ‎　　11. A. some B. more C. other D. less ‎ ‎　　12. A. speaks B. is speaking C. spoke D. is spoken ‎ ‎　　13. A. able B. possible C. unable D. not possible ‎ ‎　　14. A. careful B. forgetful C. wonderful D. helpful ‎ ‎　　15. A. either B. whether C. what D. how ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文主要想告诉读者，学英语是一个长期而艰苦的劳动，没有任何捷径可走。无论你用什么方法学习——用书、机器或在学校，不多实践就无法达到预期的目的。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。这里的or是“否则”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据作者的观点，这种事绝对不可能发生。impossible是一个形容词，不符语法，can’t后不可能跟happens，often意思与作者的意图相反。 ‎ ‎　　D。唯一容易学的语言是母语。这里需要一个形容词充当后置定语。 ‎ ‎　　A。用来修饰不可数名词，只有用how much，全句意为“母语好学，还需要那么多的练习。”何况外语呢？。 ‎ ‎　　B。动词不定式充当目的状语。意为“学习外语来研究文学”。 ‎ ‎　　C。说某种语言用speak，speak English，speak Chinese。 ‎ ‎　　D。用it代指上文所说的a foreign language。 ‎ ‎　　B。这里的with是“用”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。作者在这里提出一种假设。如果他们一星期只有一两次使用外语。 ‎ ‎　　C。固定短语，意为“做某事花费某人多长时间”。 ‎ ‎　　B。后面省略了than 6 hours。意为6个小时或更多的时间。 ‎ ‎　　D。it 代指上文所指的foreign language，故用被动被态。 ‎ ‎　　C。许多人不可能做到这一点。这里不可以用not possible，因为它的主语不可以用人。 ‎ ‎　　D。机器和书对于学习英语来说是很有帮助的。 ‎ ‎　　B。whether …or…固定短语。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇38‎ I have tried many ways to be 1 . I don’t wear a sweater when I 2 , and two days ago I walked in the 3 without my shoes. But so far nothing 4 . Debbie once told me about a boy in her class who liked 5 school. He would rub(摩擦) the end of the thermometer (温度计) until it went 6 to 39℃. Then he’d put it in his mouth and his mother would think he was 7 ill. ‎ This morning I tried doing that but it 8 went above 35℃ and I rubbed it for ten 9 . So I held the thermometer 10 the light on my desk and it went up to 40℃. I thought I’d put it in my mouth and walk downstairs like that. 11 my mother would take it out and she would be 12 when she saw that I was rather ill. ‎ The only trouble was I didn’t know the thermometer would be so 13 , As soon as I put it into my mouth I burnt my tongue(舌头)! I spit (吐) the thermometer out. It fell 14 the floor but it 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A . well B. fine C. ill D. bad ‎ ‎　　2. A . could B. should C. must D. might ‎ ‎　　3. A . water B. rain C. sun D. wind ‎ ‎　　4. A . happens B. happened C. will happen D. has happened ‎ ‎　　5. A . being away from B. leaving ‎ ‎　　C. staying at D. being out of ‎ ‎　　6. A . on B. down C. up D. off ‎ ‎　　7. A . really B. real C. bad D. badly ‎ ‎　　8. A . can’t B. not C. never D. didn’t ‎ ‎　　9. A . seconds B. hours C. minutes D. moments ‎ ‎　　10. A . near B. near to C. next D. next to ‎ ‎　　11. A . When B. Then C. So D. If ‎ ‎　　12. A . worried B. surprised C. happy D. frightened ‎ ‎　　13. A . cold B. hot C. warm D. cool ‎ ‎　　14. A . off B. down C. to D. on ‎ ‎　　15. A . didn’t break B. didn’t broke C. wasn’t broken D. was broken ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇小幽默。一个男孩为了装病，用尽了各种办法想告诉妈妈自己的体温很高，结果差点儿烫伤了自己。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1．C。根据下文得知，这个小孩就是想让自己生病。 ‎ ‎　　2．B。这里应选择情态动词should, 表示在该穿毛衣的时候他不穿, 其实他就是想让自己冻出病来。 ‎ ‎　　3．B。跟上两题同解。 ‎ ‎　　4．D。so far常与动词的现在完成时连用，表示“到目前为止”。 ‎ ‎　　5．A。leave school表示“辍学、毕业离校”的动作，be away from school则表示“不上学、逃学”的状态。 ‎ ‎　　6．C。up表示“温度上升”。 ‎ ‎　　7．A。妈妈会认为他真的病了，故选副词really。 ‎ ‎　　8．C。其他选项在语法上均错。 ‎ ‎　　9．C。根据文意。 ‎ ‎　　10．D。next to表示“临近、非常接近”。 ‎ ‎　　11．B。Then是副词，表时间上的“顺承”。 其他三选项均引导从句, 故不选。 ‎ ‎　　12．A。妈妈得知孩子生病, 首先感到担心。 ‎ ‎　　13．B。这里表示“烫”, 所以不能选warm。 ‎ ‎　　14．D。fall on为“掉到……上”, fall off 是指“从某处摔下”, fall down是“落下”。 ‎ ‎　　15．C。break为及物动词, 与主语构成动宾关系，所以用被动语态形式was broken。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇39‎ Do you know Eskimos (爱斯基摩人)? Let me tell you something about their 1 . ‎ The Eskimos live near the North Pole (北极). There are only two 2 there, winter and summer, There are no spring 3 autumn there. The winter nights are 4 . You can’t 5 the sun for more than two months, even at noon. The summer days are long. For more than two months, the sun never 6 and there is no night. ‎ The Eskimos have 7 clothes. They make their clothes from the skin of animals. From these skins they make coats, caps and 8 . ‎ Near the North Pole trees can’t grow, for it is too 9 there. The Eskimos 10 make their houses from skins, snow or stones (石头). When they 11 in storm and can’t 12 home, they make house of snow. They 13 these snow houses when the storm is 14 . ‎ Life is 15 for the Eskimos, but they still like to live there. ‎ ‎　　1. A. work B. life C. holiday D. families ‎ ‎　　2. A. weather B. seasons C. months D. years ‎ ‎　　3. A. not B. or C. and D. as ‎ ‎　　4. A. short B. warm C. long D. cold ‎ ‎　　5. A. see B. watch C. look D. look at ‎ ‎　　6. A. rises B. goes up C. drops D. goes down ‎ ‎　　7. A. beautiful B. metal C. warm D. cool ‎ ‎　　8. A. goods B. drinks C. medicine D. shoes ‎ ‎　　9. A. cold B. hot C. dry D. wet ‎ ‎　　10. A. will B. should C. never D. have to ‎ ‎　　11. A. go out B. go over C. keep on D. get on ‎ ‎　　12. A. get back B. got off C. get on D. get in ‎ ‎　　13. A. make B. leave C. stay D. break ‎ ‎　　14. A. over B. coming C. going D. hard ‎ ‎　　15. A. easy B. interesting C. hard D. lucky ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了爱斯基摩人的生活情况：爱斯基摩人的特殊生活习惯缘于那儿的特殊气候。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据下文得知这里介绍的是爱斯基摩人的生活（life）。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。根据winter和summer判断。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。no....or....表示对两者否定。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。由后一句话可推断答案。冬夜很长，几乎看不到太阳，也就是没有白天，这正是北极的气候特征。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。see表示“看”的结果，watch和look都表示“看”的动作。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。夏天白昼长，几乎没有夜晚，太阳从不下山，所以选 go down。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。他们要穿上暖和的衣服才能抵御严寒。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。这里是指用动物皮来做衣服鞋帽。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。北极很冷。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。表示客观原因使他们不得不用特殊的材料来建房。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。表示在外面遇到风暴时。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。由于风暴而回不了家。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。用雪造房是因为遇到风暴回不了家，风暴过后自然要离开雪房子了。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。be over表示结束。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。这种恶劣的气候条件下，生活是很艰难困苦的，故选hard。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇40‎ Life in the twenty-first century will be very 1 . Many changes will take place, but 2 will the changes be. ‎ The population is growing 3 . There will be many 4 in the world and most of them will live 5 than people in the twentieth century. ‎ Computers will be much smaller and 6 and there will be at least one in every 7 . And 8 studies will be one of the important subjects in school then. ‎ People will work 9 and they will have more free time for sports, watching TV and travelling. 10 will be much easier and cheaper. And many more people will go to 11 countries for holidays. ‎ There will be changes in our 12 , too. Maybe no one will eat meat every day, instead, they eat more fruit and vegetables. Maybe people will be 13 . Work in the future will be different, too. 14 and hard work can be done by robots. Because of this, 15 will not have enough work to do .This will be a problem. ‎ ‎　　1. A. interesting B. hard C. different D. beautiful ‎ ‎　　2. A. why B. how C. when D. what ‎ ‎　　3. A. slowly B. fast C. quietly D. suddenly ‎ ‎　　4. A. people B. workers C. scientists D. doctors ‎ ‎　　5. A. long B. longer C. happy D. lucky ‎ ‎　　6. A. more useful B. useful C. helpful D. less useful ‎ ‎　　7. A. hospital B. factory C. home D. town ‎ ‎　　8. A. science B. maths C. English D. computer ‎ ‎　　9. A. fewer hours B. more hours ‎ ‎　　C. eight hours D. more than eight hours ‎ ‎　　10. A. Seeing doctors B. Going to the cinema ‎ ‎　　C. Shopping D. Travelling ‎ ‎　　11. A. rich B. other C. poor D. small ‎ ‎　　12. A. food B. clothes C. fruit D. drinks ‎ ‎　　13. A. fatter B. thinner C .healthier D. more pleased ‎ ‎　　14. A. Safe B. Easy C. Simple D. Dangerous ‎ ‎　　15. A. a few people B. all the people ‎ ‎　　C. many people D. some people ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了二十一世纪我们社会将发生的各种各样的变化，包括就业，饮食等一系列的变化。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1. C。以下讲的是二十一世纪发生的一系列的变化，由于变化，生活也就变得与以前不同，故而选C。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。这些变化会是哪些变化呢？What在这里充当的是表语。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。众所周知，人口增长速度很快。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。由上下文可知，这里指人口增多，故选people。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。由于生活条件和习惯的改变，人们寿命将会更长，所以longer为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。电脑将发挥更大的作用，故选比较级more useful。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。电脑将走进各家各户。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。这一小节都讲的是电脑，故选D。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。根据下文得知人们将有更多的时间用来娱乐，证明工作时间减少了，故选fewer hours。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。根据下文的for holidays可知这里说的是旅行。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。由于条件好了，更多的人都能够去其他国家旅游了，故选other。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。根据下句得知，这里讲的是饮食变化。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。由于饮食习惯发生变化，人们将更加健康。 ‎ ‎　　14. D。和hard并列的词应选择dangerous。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。因为很多工作都是由机器人来完成，那么许多人也就面临着失业的危险。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇41‎ Many people go to school for an education. 1 learn languages, history, geography, physics, chemistry and maths. Others go to school to learn a skill so that they can 2 a living. School 3 is very important and useful. Yet no one can learn everything from school. A teacher, no matter how much he 4 , can not teach his students everything they 5 to know. The teacher’s job is to show his students how to read and how to 6 . So much more is to be learned 7 school by the students themselves. ‎ It is always more important to know how to study by 8 than to memorize(熟记)some facts or formula(公式). It is 9 quite easy to learn a 10 fact in history or a formula in mathematics. But it is very difficult to use a formula in 11 out a maths problem. Great scientists, such as Einstein, Newton and Galileo, didn’t learn many things from school. But they were all so 12 that they invented so many things for mankind. ‎ The 13 for their success is that they knew how to study. They read books that were not 14 at school. They worked hard all their lives, wasting not a single moment. They would ask many questions as they read and they did thousands of 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. Students B. They C. We D. People ‎ ‎　　2. A. make B. do C. have D. get ‎ ‎　　3. A. education B. degree C. lesson D. task ‎ ‎　　4. A. teaches B. knows C. learns D. practises ‎ ‎　　5. A. manage B. expect C. fail D. want ‎ ‎　　6. A. study B. play C. think D. work ‎ ‎　　7. A. From B. in C. within D. outside ‎ ‎　　8. A. heart B. students C. us D. oneself ‎ ‎　　9. A. not B. actually C. seldom D. known ‎ ‎　　10.A. real B. true C. certain D. great ‎ ‎　　11. A. setting B. working C. making D. doing ‎ ‎　　12. A. famous B. popular C. successful D. modest ‎ ‎　　13. A. experiment B. reason C. result D. way ‎ ‎　　14. A. kept B. showed C. expressed D. taught ‎ ‎　　15. A. duties B. jobs C. experiments D. records ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文讲述了自主学习的重要性。也就是说对于学生而言应该学会如何学习才是更重要的。而对于教师而言，不仅要教学生文化知识，更应教会他们如何学习，正所谓“授之以鱼，不如授之以渔”。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1. B。they指上句中的many people。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。make a living意思是“谋生”。这里表示学一门技术来谋生。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。school education 意为“学校教育”。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。意思是“不管他懂多少”。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。表示学生想知道的东西 。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。老师不仅教学生文化知识，更应该教会学生如何思考。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。指应该更多的从校外获取知识。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。study by oneself自学。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。actually副词，“事实上”。actually easy 表示“真的很简单”。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。certain这里指“某一个，固定的”。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。work out意思是“解出”。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。上述的这些人都很成功。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。reason和for搭配，表示“……的原因”。 ‎ ‎　　14. D。被动语态,表示“学校不教的书”。意思是他们获取了很多课外知识。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。这些科学家都做了很多实验。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇42‎ About 70,000,000 Americans are trying to lose weight(减肥). That is almost 1 out of every 3 people in the United States. Some people eat 1 food and they hardly have any fats or sweets. Others do running, exercise with machines, take medicines, or even have operations. 2 you can see losing weight is 3 work, and it will also cost a lot of money. But __4 do so many people in the United States want to lose weight? ‎ ‎ Many people in the United States worry about their look of the body. For many people, looking nice also means to be 5 . Other people worry about their health as many doctors 6 overweight is not good. ‎ ‎ Most people want to find an 7 way to take off fat, and books of this kind are very popular. These books tell people how to lose weight. Each year a lot of new books like these are 8 . Each one says it can easily help people take fat away. ‎ ‎ Losing weight can be 9 . Some overweight people go to health centres, like La Costa in California. Men and women 10 several hundred dollars a day at these health centres. People live there for one week or two, 11 exercise, eating different foods. Meals there may be just a little. All these work for losing weight. __12__ 4 days on the programme, one woman called Mrs. Warren lost 5 pounds (2.27kg). At $ 400 a day, she spent $ 320 to lose each pound. But she said she was still __13__ to do so. ‎ ‎ Health centres, books, medicines, operations, running and exercise machines all __14__ a lot of money. So in the United States, losing weight may mean losing __15__ too. ‎ ‎　　1. A. less B. more C. nice D. fast ‎ ‎　　2. A. For B. So C. Or D. And ‎ ‎　　3. A. good B. useful C. hard D. easy ‎ ‎　　4. A. why B. what C. how D. when ‎ ‎　　5. A. high B. short C. thin D. fat ‎ ‎　　6. A. talk B. say C. speak D. tell ‎ ‎　　7. A. dearer B. harder C. shorter D. easier ‎ ‎　　8. A. taken B. given C. written D. copied ‎ ‎　　9. A. cheap B. expensive C. easy D. safe ‎ ‎　　10. A. pay B. cost C. take D. have ‎ ‎　　11. A. making B. taking C. playing D. using ‎ ‎　　12. A. Before B. In C. After D. At ‎ ‎　　13. A. sorry B. angry C. sad D. glad ‎ ‎　　14. A. need B. have C. use D. get ‎ ‎　　15. A. health B. time C. food D. money ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇文章讲的是美国有三分之一的人正在努力减肥，他们想尽了一切办法去减轻体重，同时也令他们耗费了不少的金钱。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。为了减肥，有些人只吃很少的食物。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。根据上文，得知下面这个结论。所以选so表示因果关系。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。减肥令人们不得不做很多令人痛苦的事，故是一项艰苦的工作。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。下文讲的是人们减肥的原因，所以选why。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。现在很多人都认为想要让自己看上去漂亮就得瘦，正是这种观点促使很多人要减肥。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。这四个词当中只有say 可以直接加说话内容。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。人们都希望减肥能够既快又简单。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。因为很多人都想减肥，所以就有人写这方面的书籍来吸引减肥者。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。根据下文得知减肥有时是一件很昂贵的事。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。 在表示花钱的几个动词中，只有pay 和 spend 的主语为人，这里没有 spend, 故选pay。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。 take exercise意思是“锻炼”。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。 ‎ ‎　　13. D。 虽然昂贵，但她还是很乐意去做。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。 所有这些减肥的项目都是需要花费很多钱的。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。 综上所述，减肥也就意味着失去了很多金钱。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇43‎ When the boys 1 home, it was eleven o’clock. It was dark 2 but there was a light inside their home and the door 3 . They could see a man inside. ‎ ‎“Who can 4 be? ” Said Peter. “Mother and Father 5 to do some 6 . They won’t be home 7 eight o’clock. ” ‎ When the man saw Peter, he looked 8 . Then he smiled and said. “Come in! You don’t know me, but I’m a friend of 9 .” The man didn’t see John. ‎ Peter went inside and began 10 to the man but John didn’t. He quickly but quietly ran off. He soon found a policeman and brought him back 11 home. The man was 12 there, but when he saw the policeman, he tried to run off. The policeman caught him 13 the arm. Just then the boys’ parents 14 . ‎ ‎“Is the man your friend?” The policeman asked Mr. Turner . ‎ ‎“No, he is a thief. He wanted to steal my money. 15 nice of you to catch him.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. reached B. arrived at C. goes to D. reached to ‎ ‎　　2. A. out of B. outside C. outsides D. inside ‎ ‎　　3. A. opened B. was open C. was opened D. open ‎ ‎　　4. A. he B. she C. it D. that ‎ ‎　　5. A. have been B. have gone C. go D. went ‎ ‎　　6. A. shops B. shopping C. shoppings D. shop ‎ ‎　　7. A. until B. at C. to D. before ‎ ‎　　8. A. frightening B. fear C. frightened D. surprised ‎ ‎　　9. A. your father B. your father’s C. your motherD. your family ‎ ‎　　10. A. saying B. talking C. speaking D. telling ‎ ‎　　11. A. to B. to their C. their D. at ‎ ‎　　12. A. already B. always C. still D. yet ‎ ‎　　13. A. in B. on C. at D. by ‎ ‎　　14. A. returned B. returned back ‎ ‎　　C. had returned D. had returned back ‎ ‎　　15. A. It’s B. This’s C. This is D. So is ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个两小孩智斗小偷的故事，体现了两个小孩的机智勇敢，随机应变。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。home是副词，前面不加介词。 ‎ ‎　　B。外面天黑。 ‎ ‎　　B。open的形容词还是open，故选 was open, 表状态，意为“敞开着的。 ‎ ‎　　C。没看清对方的性别、容貌，常用it来指代之。 ‎ ‎　　B。 have gone to 表示“去了，还没回来”，have been to 表示“曾经去过”。 ‎ ‎　　B。do some shopping为固定搭配 。 ‎ ‎　　A。固定结构not.…..until意为“直到……才……”。 ‎ ‎　　C。frightened 表示人内心的恐慌和害怕，而frightening则表示某物或某事令人害怕。 ‎ ‎　　B。a friend of one’s 表示“某人的一个朋友”。 ‎ ‎　　B。talk to sb表示“和某人交谈”。而speak to sb, say to sb均表示“对某人讲”。 ‎ ‎　　B。 home如果前面不加冠词或物主代词，它则是副词，不能加to。反之则是名词，必须加to。故选to their home。 ‎ ‎　　C。那个小偷还在，故选still。 ‎ ‎　　D。catch sb by the arm表示“抓住某人的胳膊”。 ‎ ‎　　A。由just then 可知这里应用一般过去时。 ‎ ‎　　A。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇44‎ It is common in English to ask people about their holidays. In the ‎ West, many 1 go away on holiday during the summer months, 2 so it is very usual to 3 about this. If the holiday has not 4 taken place, then their holiday plans 5 be talked about. And if it is already over, then where 6 went, whether they 7 it and so on can be discussed. Similar questions are asked 8 some public holidays. ‎ ‎ 9 living and working in China often 10 opportunities for travel, either at weekends or during 11 holidays, so such kind of 12 lead to fruitful discussions. They may be 13 to know if they have chosen the 14 places, especially those a little less 15 ones. ‎ ‎　　1. A. factories B. families C. schools D. farms ‎ ‎　　2. A. but B. and C. because D. for ‎ ‎　　3. A. ask B. see C. know D. write ‎ ‎　　4. A. still B. already C. yet D. often ‎ ‎　　5. A. must B. should C. need D. can ‎ ‎　　6. A. we B. he C. they D. she ‎ ‎　　7. A. liked B. followed C. finished D. found ‎ ‎　　8. A. to B. before C. with D. by ‎ ‎　　9. A. Visitors B. Foreigners C. Strangers D. Players ‎ ‎　　10. A. make B. carry C. have D. keep ‎ ‎　　11. A. his B. her C. their D. its ‎ ‎　　12. A. Answers B. exercises C. excuses D. Questions ‎ ‎　　13. A. glad B. interested C. worried D. lucky ‎ ‎　　14. A. right B. different C. helpful D. terrible ‎ ‎　　15. A. expensive B. famous C. useful D. friendly ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　天气和假期永远是西方人日常谈论的话题，所以要了解西方文化就必须对他们的节假日有足够的了解。本文为你提供了一些，想必你会对西方的文化有进一步的了解。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。节假日中人们喜欢一家人一起出去游玩。 ‎ ‎　　B。and这里表承接。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据第一句话中的提示。 ‎ ‎　　C。yet用于现在完成时的否定句中，其他词均不可以。 ‎ ‎　　C。在旅游前，人们需要谈论一下计划，故选need 。 ‎ ‎　　C。本文都是以第三人称写的。 ‎ ‎　　A。节假日过后，人们总会互相询问是否喜欢自己的旅行。 ‎ ‎　　B。有时一些相似的问题也会在假日来临之前就被讨论，故选before。 ‎ ‎　　B。这里讲的是外国人的旅游习惯，包括那些在中国工作和生活的外国人。visitors则是片面的，仅指游客，故不选。 ‎ ‎　　C。have opportunities意为“有机会”。 ‎ ‎　　C。与第6题同解。 ‎ ‎　　D。本文是围绕人们问旅游方面的问题展开的，故选questions 。 ‎ ‎　　B。他们对以下的事感兴趣，想知道其中情况，故选B。 ‎ ‎　　A。他们很想知道自己有没有选对地方，故选right 。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据常识，人们一般会认为著名的地方都是正确的选择，所以人们想知道那些不太著名的地方是否是正确的选择。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇45‎ Dear George, ‎ Half a year has gone by 1 we said goodbye to each other at the Kaitak airport (飞机场) . Except for 2 hurriedly written notes you have not written to any of your old 3 any letters 4 a few days. We are studying 5 a foreign university, but know 6 of what is going on about you. ‎ Last night, John, Tom and I 7 a happy reunion (重聚) in dinner. It was all like the old high school 8 except that you were not in this get together. 9 we all felt 10 you. We then began to talk about you and wondered 11 at that moment. At last we 12 to your health. ‎ What kind of life you are living in London? Is your school-work keeping you 13 ? And there are a thousand things we want to 14 . Please tell us. ‎ My 15 regards (问候) , also John’s and Tom’s. ‎ ‎ Your old friend, ‎ ‎ Tonny ‎ ‎　　A. since B. after C. before D. when ‎ ‎　　A. little B. a little C. few D. a few ‎ ‎　　A. classmates B. friends’ C. comrades’ D. masters’ ‎ ‎　　A. in B. for C. with D. during ‎ ‎　　A. in B. at C. on D. to ‎ ‎　　A. something B. everything C. anything D. nothing ‎ ‎　　A. made B. started C. had D. did ‎ ‎　　A. time B. place C. days D. teaching ‎ ‎　　A. Suddenly B. But C. Or D. And ‎ ‎　　A. to miss B. in missing C. miss D . missing ‎ ‎　　A. what were you doing B. what you were doing ‎ ‎　　C. how were you doing D. how you were doing ‎ ‎　　A. drink B. drank C. had drunk D. was drinking ‎ ‎　　 A. busy B. happy C. free D. sorry ‎ ‎　　A. understand B. hear C. see D. know ‎ ‎　　A. good B. better C. best D. well ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一封温馨老友的来信，信中提到了同学的重聚勾起了对往日学校生活和昔日同窗的怀念。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。主句是现在完成时，从句由since引导。 ‎ ‎　　D。a few和few均修饰可数名词，但few表否定。 ‎ ‎　　A。其它三种表达方式错误，这里无需用名词的所有格。 ‎ ‎　　B。for加一段时间用于现在完成时表延续。 ‎ ‎　　A。in a university / at university均可以表示上大学，这里因为已有了a故选in，而不选at。 ‎ ‎　　D。因为好久没通信，所以对George的情况一无所知。 ‎ ‎　　A。have a reunion为固定搭配。 ‎ ‎　　C。想起了过去的日子，故选days。 ‎ ‎　　A。 ‎ ‎　　D。feel doing something表示“感觉……”。 ‎ ‎　　B。宾语从句用陈述语序。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据上下文的时态可知这里用一般过去时。 ‎ ‎　　A。朋友们都想知道学校里的事是否让他很忙。这里可以比较四个选项的意思，再根据上文的意思可知选busy。 ‎ ‎　　D。他们想知道许多关于George的事。 ‎ ‎　　C。my best regards相当于my best wishes 。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇46‎ One will feel happy when others flatter( 奉承) him in his face. It is said that the best way of flattering someone is to give him a “top hat” 1 . ‎ A student was going to leave the capital to become 2 official(官员) in a city far away. Before he started, he came to say 3 to his teacher. ‎ ‎“It is 4 job to be a good official.” his teacher said. “ you must be strict 5 yourself and never be careless.” ‎ ‎“Don’t worry about me, sir.” The student answered. “I have already 6 one hundred top hats, which will 7 those people quite happy.” ‎ ‎“But we are really gentlemen! 8 could a real gentleman do such a thing” his teacher was a bit 9 . “Never forget 10 I taught you in class!” ‎ ‎“ 11 are always right, sir I also hate such things. But, sir, 12 no one really gentleman like you can be seen in the world now.” said the student. It seemed that he had to do so. ‎ After hearing this , the teacher was 13 . “What you said is true!” ‎ ‎“I have 14 one top hat already. Now I have ninety-nine 15 .” the student said to his friend later on when he asked the student what he had talked with the teacher about. ‎ ‎　　1. A. to put on B. putting on C. wearing D to wear ‎ ‎　　2. A. a B . the C. an D. / ‎ ‎　　3. A. hello B. good bye C. OK D. thanks ‎ ‎　　4. A. not an easy B. not easy C. a good D. difficult ‎ ‎　　5. A. about B. with C. from D. to ‎ ‎　　6. A. made B. Bought C. prepared D. repaired ‎ ‎　　7. A. give B. let C. keep D. make ‎ ‎　　8. A. How B. What C. Why D. When ‎ ‎　　9. A. anger B. angry C. angrily D. angrily ‎ ‎　　10. A. that B. how C. why D. what ‎ ‎　　11.A. You B. We C. They D. Us ‎ ‎　　12. A. hardly B. about C. almost D. nearly ‎ ‎　　13. A. disappointed B. pleased C. angry D. sorry ‎ ‎　　14. A. sent out B. bought C. sold D. borrowed ‎ ‎　　15. A. left B. already C. yet D. else ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一则幽默，说明许多人都喜欢听奉承话，有的人自以为清高，其实也被戴上“高帽子”, 而自己却不知道。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. D。 wear 表示状态， put on 表示动作。根据结构give sb. sth. to do可知D为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。 因为要去另一个城市工作了, 故向他的老师道别。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。 想做一个好官员, 应该说是不容易的。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。 be strict with sb 意为“对某人严格要求”。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。 准备了一百个高帽子，其实就是奉承的好话，而不是做或是买了许多高帽子。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。 make sb. happy意为“使某人高兴”。 ‎ ‎　　8. A。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。 这里应该用形容词，表示老师听了他的话有点生气。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。 由what 引导宾语从句，表示不要忘了老师教过的事。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。 You are right表示赞同老师说的话。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。 当出现 no, nothing nobody 等一系列否定词的时候，只能用almost 不能用 nearly。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。 听了奉承话以后, 他很高兴。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。 表示送出了一顶, 而不是买或者卖，与上文相呼应。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。 left 这里表示“剩下的, 剩余的”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇47‎ ‎“It’s over! Thank goodness!” school was 1 and I was tired. I 2 at the front of the school bus. ‎ Janie, the driver, tries to 3 the uncomfortable atmosphere by striking the match of talks. I try to listen 4 , but usually I am too 5 thinking about my day. On this day, however, her talk was worth 6 . ‎ ‎“My father’s ill ,” she said to no one in particular(特别地). I could see worry in her 7 . I had never seen her like this before. She always meets students 8 a smile. ‎ With a sudden change of interest, I asked, “ what’s wrong with him?” ‎ With her eyes wet and her voice 9 , she answered, “Heart trouble.” Her eyes lowered as she continued. “I’ve already 10 my mum, so I don’t think I can stand losing him.” I couldn’t answer. My heart ached for her. ‎ I sat on the 11 thinking of the great pain my own mother was thrown into when her father died. I saw how hard it was, and still is, for her. I wouldn’t want to anyone to go through that. ‎ Suddenly I realized Janie wasn’t only a bus 12 , that was just her job. She had a whole world of family and cares 13 . ‎ I suddenly 14 very selfish. I paid no attention to Janie because she was a bus driver. I had judged her by her job and brushed her off as unimportant. ‎ I shouldn’t have been so selfish and self-centered. 15 people is an art. ‎ ‎　　1. A. in B. off C. over D. on ‎ ‎　　2. A. ran B. walked C. sat D. stood ‎ ‎　　3. A. rest B. break C. close D. open ‎ ‎　　4. A. polite B. rude C. politely D. quickly ‎ ‎　　5. A. busy B. free C. busily D. freely ‎ ‎　　6. A. looking at B. agreeing with C. talking to D. listening to ‎ ‎　　7. A. eyes B. face C. mouth D. ears ‎ ‎　　8. A. with B. within C. without D. for ‎ ‎　　9. A. usually B. usual C. unusual D. truly ‎ ‎　　10.A. remembered B. forgotten C. lost D. missed ‎ ‎　　11. A. seat B. house C. room D. desk ‎ ‎　　12. A. worker B. driver C. teacher D. doctor ‎ ‎　　13. A. also B. either C. too D. at all ‎ ‎　　14. A. felt B. feel C. thought D. was ‎ ‎　　15. A. Looking at B. Understanding C. Getting to know D. Watching ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　通过这则短文，我们知道每个人除了在工作中扮演不同的社会角色外，他还是一个普通的家庭成员，有自己的喜怒哀乐，所以我们应当相互关心，相互爱护，理解他人的苦衷。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。根据上下文Thank goodness、tired的提示，可知是放学了。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。根据第11选项知道他是坐着的，不是站在公共汽车上。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。表示打破沉闷的气氛。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。别人讲话时，你应该有礼貌地去倾听，故选副词politely修饰动词listen。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。be busy doing表示“忙于做某事”。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。根据文章可知，今天她的话却值得一听。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。表示从她眼里可看得出她的担心，而face则应和on搭配。 ‎ ‎　　8. A。with a smile 表示“面带笑容”。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。因为悲伤，所以她的声音和平时有所不同。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。因为她已经失去了母亲，所以不能承受再失去父爱的痛苦。miss表示错过，不表示丢失或失去，故不选。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。坐在座位上。 ‎ ‎　　12. B。我们从文章开始就知道Janie是一个驾驶员 ‎ ‎　　13. C。too用于句末，also 用于句中，而either用于否定句句末。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。“我”突然地觉得自己很自私。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。通过“我”的突然醒悟，告诉人们人与人之间的理解是很重要的 ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇48‎ The women’s college had a very small car park, and because several of the teachers and students, and many of the students’ boyfriends, had cars, it was often 1 to find a place to park. The head of the college, Miss Baker, had a 2 in the car park for her own small car. There were white 3 around it, and it had a small blackboard saying, “Only for Head of College.” ‎ ‎ One evening when Miss Baker got 4 to the college a few minutes before the time all the students should be in, she 5 another car in her parking place. There were two 6 in it, one of her girl students and a young man. Miss Baker 7 that the young man would have to leave soon, 8 she decided to ask him to move his car a bit, for her to park her car in the place for the night 9 going to bed. ‎ ‎ Because the young man’s car was 10 to the railing, Miss Baker had to drive up beside it on the other 11 , where the girl was sitting. She came up on this side, 12 her own window and tapped her horn lightly. The girl was having her head on the 13 shoulder. She looked round in 14 . She was even more surprised when she 15 Miss Baker say, “Excuse me, but may I change places with you?” ‎ ‎　　1. A. late B. difficult C. important D. quick ‎ ‎　　2. A. place B. seat C. room D. card ‎ ‎　　3. A. pictures B. maps C. lines D. walls ‎ ‎　　4. A. out B. up C. away D. back ‎ ‎　　5. A. stopped B. found C. caught D. missed ‎ ‎　　6. A. boys B. women C. teachers D. people ‎ ‎　　7. A. said B. forgot C. knew D. waited ‎ ‎　　8. A. until B. since C. though D. so ‎ ‎　　9. A. before B. after C. about D .from ‎ ‎　　10. A. next B. far C. ready D. same ‎ ‎　　11. A. way B. side C. hand D. corner ‎ ‎　　12. A. closed B. pulled C. opened D. cleaned ‎ ‎　　13. A. car’s B. woman’s C. park’s D. man’s ‎ ‎　　14. A. trouble B. time C. surprise D. hurry ‎ ‎　　15. A. heard B. learned C. taught D. close ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　在这篇短文里， Miss Baker 用委婉的说法请求别人让出自己的车位，却遭到别人的误解，令人啼笑皆非。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。因为停车场小，而车子却多，所以常常很难找到停车位。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。place表示“车位”。room 作为空间讲是不可数名词，故不选。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。用白色的栏杆围着，以示私人专用。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。因为是夜晚，所以是回到学校准备休息了。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。由下文得知是一男一女，故选 people。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。因为这是女校，所以她知道这位男士肯定马上要走的。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。因为她知道这个年轻人很快会走，所以她决定请他让出车位。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。表示睡觉前要把车子停好。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。next to 表示“靠近，邻近”。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。打开车窗，以便于和那辆汽车里的人讲话。 ‎ ‎　　13. D。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。in surprise表示惊讶，根据下一句more surprised可知这里她的反应是惊讶。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。hear sb. say sth.意思是“听见某人说什么”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇49‎ Long ago there was a poor farmer called Fred. Fred and his wife, Doris lived 1 together in their small old house. One winter night, the Luck Fairy (仙女) visited them . ‎ ‎“Fred, you’re a 2 farmer. I’d like to give you a wish,” said the Luck Fairy. ‎ ‎“A wish?” Said Fred. ‎ Fred and Doris smiled at each other. Then Fred said, “ Thank you , Luck Fairy. We’re very 3 and happy.” ‎ ‎“ 4 we’re old, we still work in the field every day,” said Doris. ‎ ‎“You wok very hard but you 5 very little money. Would you like some gold coins ” asked the Luck Fairy. ‎ ‎“Oh no , my dear Luck Fairy. We’re poor. But we have 6 food to eat.” Replied Fred. ‎ ‎“You can use the gold coin to buy some clothes. The winter here is very cold,” said Luck Fairy. ‎ ‎“Though we haven’t got 7 clothes, we’ve got enough,” said Doris. ‎ ‎“Well, what about a nice new house?” Asked Luck Fairy. ‎ ‎“Thank you, but I 8 my small old house very much. I’ve lived here since I was born. I don’t 9 a new house,” said Fred. ‎ ‎“You’re quite different from other people. I like you very much,” said the Luck Fairy. “I wish you happiness and Luck forever.” Then the Luck Fairy 10 and never came back. ‎ ‎　　1. A. sadly B. happily C. worried D. anxiously ‎ ‎　　2. A. bad B. lazy C. good D. unhelpful ‎ ‎　　3. A. healthy B. careful C. difficult D. important ‎ ‎　　4. A. If B. But C. Because D. Though ‎ ‎　　5. A. cost B. lose C. make D. borrow ‎ ‎　　6. A. no B. little C. enough D. expensive ‎ ‎　　7. A. old B. many C. bad D. clean ‎ ‎　　8. A. hate B. love C. need D. dislike ‎ ‎　　9. A. need B. see C. buy D. build ‎ ‎　　10. A. smiled B. nodded C. laughed D. disappeared ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这则故事告诉我们，人不必贪心，要懂得知足常乐。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据下文我们知道，这对夫妇生活得很愉快。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。正因为Fred是一个好农夫，仙女才要奖励他。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。比较这四个词的意思不难发现与happy 并列的是healthy。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。根据still可知选though。虽然他们年纪大了，但仍然能够在田里干活。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。make money意思是“赚钱”。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。根据文意，他们对一切都感到知足，包括食物他们也觉得足够吃了。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。他们没有许多衣服，但对他们来说却已经够穿了。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。根据上文，他们喜欢自己的小屋，所以不需要新的。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。根据never come back可知仙女消失了。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇50‎ A thousand years ago, Hong Kong was covered by a thick forest. As more and more people came to 1 in Hong Kong, these trees were cut down and burnt. Now there is 2 forest left, though there are still some small areas(地方) covered with trees. We call these woods. ‎ Elephants, tigers and many 3 animals were living in the thick forest. When people came to live in Hong Kong, the 4 began to die out. Early farmers grew rice and 5 pigs and chickens in the valleys. They cut down the trees and burnt them. They needed 6 to keep themselves warm in winter, to cook their food and to keep away the dangerous animals. Elephants quickly disappeared(消失) because there was not enough food for them. 7 did most of the wolves and tigers. Monkeys and many other animals soon 8 in the same way. ‎ You might think that there are no longer any animals in Hong Kong 9 in the zoos. There are still about 36 different animals 10 there. One of the most interesting of Hong Kong’s animals is the barking deer. These are beautiful little animals 11 a rich brown coat and a white patch(补丁) under the tail. They look like deer 12 but they are much like a dog 13 . In Hong Kong the barking deer has only a real enemy(敌人)— 14 . People hunt these little animals though it is illegal(违法的). There are now not many barking deer left. So it is important 15 people to protect (保护) wild animals. ‎ ‎　　1. A. work B. study C. live D. enjoy ‎ ‎　　2. A. many B. a few C. no D. not ‎ ‎　　3. A. other B. others C. the other D. another ‎ ‎　　4. A. people B. animals C. plants D. things ‎ ‎　　5. A. grew B. made C. got D. kept ‎ ‎　　6. A. fire B. hotness C. heat D. stoves(炉子) ‎ ‎　　7. A. So B. Such C. As D. Nor ‎ ‎　　8. A. lived B. died C. came D. left ‎ ‎　　9. A. besides B. except C. and D. or ‎ ‎　　10. A. live B. to live C. lived D. living ‎ ‎　　11. A. have B. without C. with D. get ‎ ‎　　12. A. high B. higher C. short D. shorter ‎ ‎　　13. A. shouting B. crying C. barking D. talking ‎ ‎　　14. A. tigers B. men C. wolves D. elephants ‎ ‎　　15. A. to B. for C. like D. of ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这则短文通过讲述香港的变化来告诫人们要保护森林、爱护动物。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。表示有了人的居住后，情况才发生了改变。 ‎ ‎　　2.C。根据下面一句话得知大面积的森林已经消失了。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。many other animals 表示其余的许多种动物，但不代表世界上所有的动物，故不选the other 。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。由于人多了，动物就变少了。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。keep 这里表示“饲养”，而grow意思是“种植”。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。根据后面的取暖、烧饭、驱赶动物，可见这里他们需要的是火。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。“so+助动词+主语”表示“某人（某物）也这样”，这里表示狼和老虎也消失了。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。跟上一句表达同样的意思。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。besides 表示“除了……还有……”，而except“除……之外”。故选except表示除了动物园其它地方就没有动物了。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。There be sb./sth.+ doing 为固定搭配。 ‎ ‎　　11. C。with引导的介宾短语常常用来表示人或物的外貌特征。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。表示长得和鹿差不多高。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。狗叫声通常用barking。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。根据整篇文章的观点就可得知人类才是动物真正的敌人。 ‎ ‎15. B。“It be + 形+for sb. + to do” 表示对某人来说做某事怎样（简单、困难、重要……）而of sb.表示人的性格或品质，如kind, bad, nice 等。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇51‎ Many of you are studying English and you may be 1 why it is so difficult to learn. It’s actually not too difficult to learn 2 you know some 3 about the language and culture that it reflects (反映). Perhaps the first thing you need to know about English is that it is made up of several other languages 4 French, German, Latin, Greek and AngloSaxon. In addition, there are words 5 Spanish in English and many American Indian words and names, even some Chinese and Japanese 6 can be found in the English language. This borrowing of words 7 other languages is 8 of the key reasons 9 some of the difficulties that people meet with (遇到) 10 they are learning English. ‎ ‎　　1. A. knowing B. wondering C. earning D. hearing ‎ ‎　　2. A. but B. and C. if D. unless ‎ ‎　　3. A. news B. facts C. truth D. information ‎ ‎　　4. A. such as B. the same as C. so as D. for example ‎ ‎　　5. A. in B. off C. of D. from ‎ ‎　　6. A. words B. culture C. language D. letters ‎ ‎　　7. A. for B. to C. from D. out ‎ ‎　　8. A. that B. something C. one D. this ‎ ‎　　9. A. why B. if C. what D. for ‎ ‎　　10. A. when B. before C. after D. while ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一段论述英语词汇是由哪几方面的因素构成的说明文。文中介绍英语词汇和哪些语言有联系。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。想知道原因。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。用if表示假设。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。some information 为“一些语言信息”。information是不可数名词。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。对组成部分的列举用such as。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。from表示来“自于……”, “选自于……”。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。句意理解题.中文和日文是English and Japanese words。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。同5。 ‎ ‎　　8. C 。one of 表示……之一。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。此句是定语从句，连接词是why。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。由于此句用的是进行时，故用while。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇52‎ Mr. Jackson was on duty that evening. It was 1 and there was thick snow outside. So 2 people came to the hospital and he could __3 on the bed in his office and soon he went to 4 . Suddenly someone knocked at the door and it woke him up. He got up and 5 the door. In went an old man. His wife was 6 and he asked the doctor to go to look her over. ‎ It was still 7 when Mr. Jackson came out. The old farmer ‎ walked fast and he hardly 8 him. It was difficult for him to walk on the snowy roads. When he got to the man’s house, he was very 9 . He looked over the old woman and found she had a bad cold. He gave her some 10 and began to return to the hospital. The wind was blowing strongly and he had to walk 11 so that he wouldn’t fall over. ‎ And when he was near the hospital, he had a 12 in his foot. ‎ He walked slowly and at last he went into his office, He 13 his shoe and looked at his foot. There was much blood (血) on it. He 14 he stepped on (踩) a broken bottle. He looked at his shoe carefully and said to 15 , “Luckily, it didn’t prick(扎)my shoe!” ‎ ‎　　1. A. hot B. warm C. cool D. cold ‎ ‎　　2. A. few B. a few C. some D. many ‎ ‎　　3. A. play B. dance C. lie down D. sit down ‎ ‎　　4. A. work B. sleep C. study D. write ‎ ‎　　5. A. closed B. mended C. opened D. broke ‎ ‎　　6. A. healthy B. strong C. weak D. ill ‎ ‎　　7. A. snowing B. shining C. raining D. singing ‎ ‎　　8. A. got on well with B. caught up with ‎ ‎　　C. looked after D. listened to ‎ ‎　　9. A. sorry B. afraid C. strange D. tired ‎ ‎　　10. A. medicine B. food C. water D. sugar ‎ ‎　　11. A. quickly B. carefully C. noisily D. heavily ‎ ‎　　12. A. hole B. sock C. pain D. pill ‎ ‎　　13. A. took off B. put up C. burnt D. sold ‎ ‎　　14. A. forgot B. remembered C. understood D. was told ‎ ‎　　15. A. him B. her C. them D. himself ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文讲的是一个好心的医生在下雪的夜里出诊，由于天黑和匆忙的缘故，他把自己的脚扎伤了，而他却幽默地安慰自己——幸好鞋子没扎坏。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. D。根据下文的下雪，故得知是一个寒冷的天气。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。由于天气的缘故，几乎无人在晚上出来看病。few和little都表示否定，但little用来修饰不可数名词，故不选。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。没有病人，医生便躺下休息了。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。go to sleep 表示“睡着”。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。因为生病才要请医生。而weak只表示虚弱，未必就得看医生。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。根据上文的天气情况可知外面仍在下雪。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。catch up意思是“跟上，赶上”。 ‎ ‎　　9. D。因为下雪路面不好行走，再加上走得快，所以走得很累。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。医生看完病后，一定会开药。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。路很难走，所以不得不小心。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。根据下文他的脚流血了，证明这里他应该感到疼痛。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。根据文意，他是在脱掉鞋子检查自己的脚。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。这里别无他人，故他是 say to himself。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇53‎ A few minutes before six o’clock, Mr. Smith began to leave. He was about to start the car when a gunman (持枪者) 1 up from the back seat. He 2 a gun to Mr. Smith’s head,“Drive me to Paris!” he shouted. ‎ ‎ “All right”Mr. Smith answered. He started the engine (发动机), pulled away from the side of the street and 3 down. Being 81 years old, he knew he could not 4 the gunman. He knew he needed help. Where were the police? As he drove 5 each crossing, he looked up and down the side streets, hoping to meet a police car. But he could see 6 .“Just my luck,” he thought. “If I was 7 too fast, there would be a police car on every corner.” ‎ ‎8 he pushed his foot down on the accelerator, and the car ran 9 faster. “What are you doing?” shouted the gunman.“Keeping off the police.” Mr. Smith answered.“I thought I saw a police car 10 there.” ‎ He ran red lights, drove wrong on one-way streets. On the two-way streets, he drove on the wrong 11 of the road. Not one of the policemen saw him. Again Mr. Smith’s plan was not working. He had to try a 12 plan. ‎ He 13 a corner and saw the police station in front. Then he drove his car as fast as he could towards the police gate. The car hit a police motorbike down and stopped. Mr. Smith shouted,“Help! Help!”Then he 14 back to grab the man’s gun. At the same time the policemen heard the 15 and quickly caught the gunman. ‎ ‎　　1. A. woke B. sat C. stood D. jumped ‎ ‎　　2. A. brought B. pointed C. held D. carried ‎ ‎　　3. A. drove B. left C. took D. pushed ‎ ‎　　4. A. fight B. lift C. keep D. hit ‎ ‎　　5. A. around B. over C. through D. towards ‎ ‎　　6. A. somebody B. anybody C. everybody D. nobody ‎ ‎　　7. A. driving B. moving C. getting D. walking ‎ ‎　　8. A. Slowly B. Suddenly C. Quietly D. Carefully ‎ ‎　　9. A. more B. much C. very D. quite ‎ ‎　　10. A. front B. near C. below D. back ‎ ‎　　11. A. street B. way C. side D. corner ‎ ‎　　12. A. new B. safe C. hard D. nice ‎ ‎　　13. A. found B. turned C. stopped at D. arrived at ‎ ‎　　14. A. got B. looked C. turned D. came ‎ ‎　　15. A. sound B. man C. voice D. noise ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了八旬老人Mr. Smith智斗歹徒的故事，故事情节扣人心弦，开始大家都会为老人捏一把汗，最后，大家又会情不自禁地佩服老人的机智与勇敢。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　Ｄ。本题考查这四个词组的意思和用法，wake up 是“醒来”的意思,sit up是“熬夜”的意思，stand up是“站起”的意思，jump up是“跳出来”，“突然出现”的意思。根据句意，可知选D比较合适。 ‎ ‎　　Ｂ。从四个选项看，歹徒拿出枪显然是指着他, 故选B。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据句意是叫他把车开走，四个词组只有A是这个意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。意为和持枪者搏斗。 ‎ ‎　　Ａ。本题考查这四个介词的用法，根据词义选A。 ‎ ‎　　Ｄ。根据上文可知，他没看见任何人，答案选D。 ‎ ‎　　Ａ。Mr. Smith是开着车的，因此四个答案中A为正确答案。 ‎ ‎　　Ｂ。根据后文提示，他踩油门后车子开得更快了，显然他是突然加大了油门，选B 。 ‎ ‎　　Ｂ。much修饰比较级，其他几个词不可修饰比较级。 ‎ ‎　　B。 “在那附近”。 ‎ ‎　　Ｃ。街道的两边应用side这个词。 ‎ ‎　　Ａ。根据句意，Mr. Smith在一计不成后又生一计, 选A。 ‎ ‎　　Ｂ。根据意思，应是在他转个弯之后才看见了交警。 ‎ ‎　　Ｃ。本题的难点在于look back to 和turn back to 的用法，两个词组的意思分别是“回头”和“转身”的意思，再联系下文，他显然是转身想抓住歹徒, 故选C。 ‎ ‎　　Ｄ。发生冲突后应产生打闹的噪音，故选D 最恰当。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇54‎ It is a thousand kilometers across that desert (沙漠). The road is 1 nearly all the way. Sometimes there is a deep sand. A driver must then put his foot down hard and drive through! There are three small 2 along the way. Vick reached the first place at ten o’clock p. m. He had his 3 in a little restaurant (餐馆) there. It was a warm 4 in August. Vick wanted to 5 through the night. The nights are warm enough in August, but the days are very, very 6 . ‎ He left the restaurant at 11: 30 and drove over 7 hours. There wasn’t a moon, but the 8 were wonderful. There was nothing else on die road. Vick thought, "It’s an empty desert. No tree, house, man. " He could 9 the endless, white road in the car’s headlights(车灯). A million stars looked down on him. ‎ It was two o’clock in the morning. Vick stopped the car. He was two hundred kilo-meters from the 10 town: "I’ll light the cooker( 炊具)," he thought, "and make some tea. " He got out of the car. ‎ He heard some sounds, ten or fifteen meters 11 . He could not see anything in the darkness(黑暗). A man said, "Good morning. It’s a 12 morning, isn’t it?" The man came forward (向前),out of the darkness; out of the desert. Vick did not move. The man said, "You are going to 13 some tea, aren’t you? I often get a cup of tea at this time. It’s two o’clock. Cars always 14 near here at this time. Sometimes I get a 15 . Now listen, and I’ll tell you a story. Then you’ll give me…" ‎ ‎　　1. A. short B. good C. busy D. well ‎ ‎　　2. A. cities B. hotels C. villages D. towns ‎ ‎　　3. A. tea B. supper C. lunch D. breakfast ‎ ‎　　4. A. night B. day C. season D. month ‎ ‎　　5. A. live B. stay C. drive D. walk ‎ ‎　　6. A. cold B. cool C. hot D. warm ‎ ‎　　7. A. two B. seven C. ten D. fourteen ‎ ‎　　8. A. trees B. animals C. stars D. clouds ‎ ‎　　9. A. see B. ride C. pass D. find ‎ ‎　　10. A. home B. other C. next D. last ‎ ‎　　11. A. about B. from C. far D. away ‎ ‎　　12. A. noisy B. lovely C. sleepy D. sunny ‎ ‎　　13. A. eat B. make C. cook D. drink ‎ ‎　　14. A. leave B. stop C. meet D. run ‎ ‎　　15. A. bread B. car C. rest D. meal ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是关于一个司机独自一人在茫茫沙漠中开车的故事，它着重描写了沙漠的荒无人烟，表达了主人公的孤单与艰辛，而如果这时在黑暗中真的走出一个人来，那会怎样呢？- ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。沙漠中的路不可能好（从下文也可知）或繁忙，所以只有用short，well有语法错误。 ‎ ‎　　D。从下文可知。 ‎ ‎　　B。下午十点钟当然是吃晚饭。 ‎ ‎　　A。上下文都可看出这时是夜晚。 ‎ ‎　　C。从下文可看出他想趁着天不太热开车。 ‎ ‎　　C。从常理和but一词可知白天天气很热。 ‎ ‎　　A。从上文的11：30和下文的2：00很容易推断出。 ‎ ‎　　C。天上没有月亮，但是有星星。其他选项天上不可能有。 ‎ ‎　　A。除了天上的星星，他还能看到的那就是车灯下无边无际的白茫茫的路。不能用find，因为意思不符合。 ‎ ‎　　C。下一个城镇是他的下一个目标。 ‎ ‎　　D。fifteen meters away 距……远。 ‎ ‎　　B。只有选lovely 。 ‎ ‎　　B。make tea 泡茶。 ‎ ‎　　B。常有司机把车停在这儿。 ‎ ‎　　D。有时不仅仅可以喝到茶，还能吃一餐呢。Bread是不可数名词。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇55‎ A thirsty bee went to a river to drink. As it was drinking, the bee was 1 away by the running water. ‎ A kind bird saw that the bee was in 2 . It picked 3 off a tree and threw 4 into the water in front of the bee. The bee climbed 5 the leaf, and it was brought 6 to the land. The bee thanked the bee a lot and then 7 . ‎ Not 8 that, the bird was sitting 9 the branch of a tree. It did not know that a man was shooting at it. But the bee saw 10 the man was doing. So it flew into the man’s 11 and stung(刺蜇) him. The 12 in the man’s eye was so great that he was not able to 13 the bird, and the bird flew away. ‎ ‎14 the bee, 15 life had been saved by the bird, was able to save the life of the bird. ‎ ‎　　1. A. flying B. brought C. flowing D. carried ‎ ‎　　2. A. trouble B. a trouble C. danger D. dangerous ‎ ‎　　3. A. a leaf B. leaves C. leaf D. the leaf ‎ ‎　　4. A. them B. one C. it D. this ‎ ‎　　5. A. onto B. on C. to D. at ‎ ‎　　6. A. safety B. safe C. saved D. safely ‎ ‎　　7. A. climbed away B. ran away C. flew away D. got away ‎ ‎　　8. A. long before B. before long C. after long D. long after ‎ ‎　　9. A. in B. on C. at D. by ‎ ‎　　10. A. that B. what C. which D. when ‎ ‎　　11. A. eye B. nose C. mouth D. ear ‎ ‎　　12. A. pain B. bee C. bird D. earache ‎ ‎　　13. A. shoot B. shoot at C. shoot to D. shoot on ‎ ‎　　14. A. In the way B. On the way C. In a way D. In this way ‎ ‎　　15. A. her B. the C. whose D. its ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文是一篇寓言，介绍了蜜蜂和小鸟互相帮助，脱离危险的故事。救人一命胜造七级浮屠，我们从中可以学到乐于施恩，不忘回报的道理。 ‎ ‎　　答案解析 ‎　　1. D。根据句意，蜜蜂是被水冲走了，所以选carried。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。in danger的意思为“处于危险之中”的意思。根据下文小鸟设法救蜜蜂的过程可以推断蜜蜂处于危险之中。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。一方面根据句意，从树上摘下的可能是“树叶（leaf）”,另一方面从下文The bee climbed __5__ the leaf，可以断定应选leaf。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。it指代上文所说的树叶。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。本题考介词的正确用法，climb onto是“爬到……上面”的意思，故选A。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。应用副词作状语，故选safely。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。根据文章的意思应为安全“飞走”之意。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。B、C显然不可选。根据上下文可知，事情发生在那件事情（that）之后，故选D。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。小鸟坐在树枝上，介词应用on。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。宾语从句中需要一个作宾语的连接代词，故选what。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。由下文可知它是飞向那个人的眼睛，使他无法射击小鸟。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。根据文章的意思应是疼痛使那人不能射杀小鸟。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。shoot是“射中、射死”的意思；shoot at是“瞄准、朝……射击”的意思，故选A。 ‎ ‎　　14. D。In the way是“挡路”的意思；On the way是“在路上”的意思；In a way是“从某种程度上”的意思；In this way是“以这种方式”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。根据句子结构分析，此空后面是一个非限制性定语从句，故选关系代词whose。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇56‎ I’m glad it’s Sunday again. I can stay in bed 1 I like, drinking tea and 2 those thick newspapers that are brought 3 the newsboy through the letterbox at 8:30. In this way, I can catch up with all the 4 I haven’t got time to read during my work time. ‎ When I 5 the papers, I then prepare my bath. The Sunday morning bath is 6 of the week. There’s no need to hurry because there’s no bus to 7 and my friends are told not to call me up before noon on Sundays, so there is no danger of 8 by the telephone. ‎ ‎9 spend the afternoon after lunch is always a bit of problem. In summer I can go to the park and sit in a chair 10 boys playing football, while in winter I sit in front of the fire and 11 when reading a book, sometimes I turn on the television and sleep through an old film. ‎ Then there’s the 12 ahead of me. Perhaps I’ll call on some friends or go to the cinema 13 a new film I want to see or to town for a concert. Oh, there are 14 pleasant ways of passing Sunday evenings. The only sad thing is that Monday morning is getting 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. as long as B. as soon as C. as well as D. as much as ‎ ‎　　2. A. read B. reading C. to read D. am reading ‎ ‎　　3. A. from B. with C. and D. by ‎ ‎　　4. A. things B. books C. information D. knowledge ‎ ‎　　5. A. am reading B. have read C. had read D. read ‎ ‎　　6. A. the much pleasant B. the more pleasant ‎ ‎　　C. the most pleasant D. the very pleasant ‎ ‎　　7. A. sit B. catch C. get in D. take ‎ ‎　　8. A. trouble B. being troubled ‎ ‎　　C. troubling D. to be troubled ‎ ‎　　9. A. What to B. How to C. When to D. Where to ‎ ‎　　10. A. looking B. seeing C. looking at D. watching ‎ ‎　　11. A. fall asleep B. go to sleep C. go to bed D.get to sleep ‎ ‎　　12. A. supper B. friend C. evening D. work ‎ ‎　　13. A. whether there’s B. if there will be ‎ ‎　　C. when there has D. if there will be ‎ ‎　　14. A. so many B. such many C. a lot D. quite few ‎ ‎　　15. A. busier B. longer C. near D. away ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本篇着重介绍作者在周日把工作抛在一边，尽情享受周日的大好时光。其实，绝大部分人都有这样的生活体验，因此，在做该题时，常识会帮助你顺利解题。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。as long as表示时间上的要多长有多长 。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。现在分词充当伴随状语，与前面的drinking并列。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。newsboy是动作的执行者，所以用by 。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。意为报纸之类的所有的东西。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。强调已读完报纸。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。通过上下文可知只有用最高级，意为“星期日的淋浴是一个星期中最令人愉快的”。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。catch a bus 赶车。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。被打扰，所以用被动式，of 后接动名词形式作宾语。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。表示怎样度过下午是个问题。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。watch sb. doing sth.。seeing也很具有迷惑性，但观看某人踢足球还是应当用watch。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。入睡，睡着。 ‎ ‎　　12 .C。下午过后，当然是夜晚就在眼前。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。这里故意把if和whether放在一起，其实，我们需要的是“假如”，而非“是否”，故选择if，本句是一个条件状语从句，故用一般现在时。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。 固定短语so…that,，such…that 另，many， much， little， few前用 so而不用such。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。意为星期一早晨临近了。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇57‎ Policemen were called by a shop in Southland early on Christmas morning. When they 1 they found two burglars (偷盗者) were kept in a lift with a heavy box of money. The two men were in their twenties. They 2 an office in the 3 and took the money box and ran 4 the lift. They did not see the sign on the door saying that it 5 no more than two people. ‎ ‎“They were kept between the 6 because they 7 a heavy box,” the police officer said, “they 8 there for six hours, 9 on what they hoped to be their Christmas 10 . They were doing this at a time when people were at 11 for the Christmas with their families. It was a very special 12 when the policemen 13 the door and they walked 14 , holding out arms. They said they had never been 15 pleased to see policemen. The policemen said they were pleased to see them too. ‎ ‎　　1. A. reached B. got C. arrived D. were ‎ ‎　　2. A. broke up B. broke out C. broke D. broke into ‎ ‎　　3. A. street B. station C. shop D. box ‎ ‎　　4. A. out B. into C. inside D. off ‎ ‎　　5. A. runs B. drives C. makes D. carries ‎ ‎　　6. A. earth B. ground C. floors D. floor ‎ ‎　　7. A. lifted B. took C. brought D. made ‎ ‎　　8. A. were kept B. kept C. were taken D. were hit ‎ ‎　　9. A. sits B. sit C. sat D. sitting ‎ ‎　　10. A. box B. tree C. present D. money ‎ ‎　　11. A. work B. home C. ease D. place ‎ ‎　　12. A. happy B. hurry C. moment D. worry ‎ ‎　　13. A. opened B. closed C. turned D. shut ‎ ‎　　14. A. away B. off C. in D. out ‎ ‎　　15. A. much B. very C. too D. so ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　读完这篇文章后，你会由衷地发出“恶有恶报”的感叹。整个故事既诙谐有趣而又富于深刻的含义。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。这里必须用不及物动词，故不用reach，而got单独使用不表示“到达”。 ‎ ‎　　D 破门而入。 ‎ ‎　　C。由上下文可知是一家商店。 ‎ ‎　　B。ran into the lift 跑进电梯。 ‎ ‎　　D。电梯只能“装得下”两人。 ‎ ‎　　C。电梯被卡在两层楼之间。 ‎ ‎　　B。此处took为“拿”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。上文已有这个词组，表示一直被关在电梯中达两小时之久。 ‎ ‎　　D。现在分词做伴随状语。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据常识，他们把偷来的箱子当作自己的圣诞礼物。 ‎ ‎　　B。此时人们还在各自的家中和家人团聚。 ‎ ‎　　C。这对于他们来说，的确是一个很特别的时刻。 ‎ ‎　　A。警察打开电梯门。 ‎ ‎　　D。门打开了，他们走出电梯。 ‎ ‎　　D。作为小偷，他们从未因看见警察而如此高兴过。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇58‎ Debbie got up early last Saturday morning. She wanted 1 in Green Park with some of her friends. She was very 2 about it. 3 she was ready, she got on her bike and 4 for the park -- it was on the other side of the town. Suddenly, as she was riding fast, she 5 sirens (警笛). The sound of the sirens was getting 6 , so Debbie looked 7 her to see what was happening. As a result (结果), she fell off her bike and lay in the middle of the road. Luckily, Debbie wasn’t hurt, 8 a car hit her bike. After the car 9 , two men got out and started running. 10 , a police car stopped next to the same car and three policemen got 11 and started running 12 the two men. One of the policemen shouted, “Stop the thieves (贼)!” ‎ ‎ 13 a policeman came to see Debbie. He thanked her because, in a 14 , she had helped them 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. goes to skate B. go skating C. going to skate D. to go skating ‎ ‎　　2. A. happy B. angry C. sad D. worried ‎ ‎　　3. A. While B. As soon as C. If D. As quickly as ‎ ‎　　4. A. carried B. left C. went D. leaving ‎ ‎　　5. A. heard B. listened to C. found D. saw ‎ ‎　　6. A. close and close B. closer and closer ‎ ‎　　C. big and big D. bigger and bigger ‎ ‎　　7. A. after B. in front of C. behind D. before ‎ ‎　　8. A. because B. so C. but D. and ‎ ‎　　9. A. fell over B. passed away ‎ ‎　　C. turned back D. stopped ‎ ‎　　10. A .Few minutes later B. Just then ‎ ‎　　C. After an hour D. Very fast ‎ ‎　　11. A. in B. of C. out of D. out ‎ ‎　　12. A. after B. before C. in front of D. behind ‎ ‎　　13. A. In a few days B. Sometimes ‎ ‎　　C. Some time later D. At the same time ‎ ‎　　14. A. word B. shop C. moment D. way ‎ ‎　　15. A. get out of the car B. run after the two men ‎ ‎　　C. catch the thieves D. shout at the thieves ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇文章写的是关于一位妇女无意间帮助警察抓获小偷的故事。读完我们不禁会说，Debbie这一跤摔得太值得了——不仅抓住了小偷，而且自己毫发无损。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　D。want to do sth 固定短语。 ‎ ‎　　A。要和朋友一起去公园，此时的心情只有“高兴”最为适合。 ‎ ‎　　B。她一准备好，就骑上自行车准备出发。As soon as “一……就……”。 ‎ ‎　　B。leave for 离开去某地。D选项形式不对。 ‎ ‎　　A。听见警笛。意为“听”这个动作。这里强调“听见”这个状态。 ‎ ‎　　B。警笛越来越近。Bigger and bigger很容易被当选，但形容声音最好用louder and louder。 ‎ ‎　　C。看她的身后。 ‎ ‎　　C。虽然自己没伤着，但自行车还是被一辆小汽车给撞了。 ‎ ‎　　D。从下文可知，小汽车是停下来了，而不是“走过”或“转弯” ‎ ‎　　B。就在这时警察也过来了。其他选项所表达的时间太慢了，根据上下文可知，都是不可能。 ‎ ‎　　D。get out 出来。如果要选C得加一个宾语the car 。 ‎ ‎　　A。run after 追赶，跟在后面跑。 ‎ ‎　　C。应该是在小偷被抓之后，所以这个最为准确。 ‎ ‎　　D。in a way 固定短语，“在某种程度上”。 In a word “总而言之”；in a shop “在商店里”；in a moment 一会儿。 ‎ ‎　　C。是她协助抓住小偷的。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇59‎ The water and the land are thought part of the earth surface (表面). The air is 1 thought a kind of blanket (毯子) 2 the earth. But it is 3 than that. Maybe you have been in a cave (洞穴) 4 in the earth. Did you think about the air that was in the cave? The land has some air mixed in it. Air is even mixed 5 the water in the sea. These examples show that some air is 6 the earth’s surface as well as above it. ‎ Men once 7 that there were four basic things from which everything else was made. They 8 these things-earth, fire, air and water the four elements (元素). 9 man made more observations, they 10 that fire was not an element. 11 they concluded (得出结论) that land, air and water were not elements, 12 . ‎ ‎13 , there are more than 100 elements from which scientists believe all things are made. 14 land, air and water are not elements, they are three main parts of man’s environment (环境). You will 15 more about them as you study the earth. ‎ ‎　　1. A. usually B. seldom C. never D. sometimes ‎ ‎　　2. A. above B. around C. across D. among ‎ ‎　　3. A. better B. more C. less D. worse ‎ ‎　　4. A wide B. high C. long D. deep ‎ ‎　　5. A. at B. in C. with D. to ‎ ‎　　6. A. below B. before C. between D. beside ‎ ‎　　7. A. found B. thought C. knew D. understood ‎ ‎　　8. A. called B. told C. name D. said ‎ ‎　　9. A. That B. For C. As D. So ‎ ‎　　10. A. believe B. planned C. decided D. want ‎ ‎　　11. A. End B. At last C. Hardly D. Nearly ‎ ‎　　12. A. too B. neither C. also D. either ‎ ‎　　13. A. True B. Read C. In fact D. Correctly ‎ ‎　　14. A. When B. As C. Since D. Though ‎ ‎　　15. A. exam B. study C. exercise D. know ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本篇着重介绍与人们的生活休戚相关的地球、水、空气以及人们对它们的认识过程。这是一篇说明文，文章浅显易懂。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。空气通常被看成是裹在地球外表的毯子。 ‎ ‎　　B。 ‎ ‎　　B。more than固定短语“不仅仅”。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据常识，洞穴当然在地球的深处。 ‎ ‎　　C。固定短语be mixed with。 ‎ ‎　　A。与下文中above的意思相反，即在地表之下。 ‎ ‎　　B。人们误以为，事实并非如此。 ‎ ‎　　A。他们“称之为……”told , said 都不准确，而name的时态不对。 ‎ ‎　　C。这里的as有“随着”的意思，相当于when 。 ‎ ‎　　C。此处decided意为“得出结论”。believe很具有迷惑性，但其时态不对。特别要当心呀。 ‎ ‎　　B。最终得出结论。另外三个选择都很显然不对。 ‎ ‎　　D。 either用于否定句，“也不”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　C。 无论是语法结构还是意思只有In fact对。 ‎ ‎　　D。 尽管它们不是元素，但他们是人类环境的三个主要部分。 ‎ ‎　　D。 你会对它们了解得更多。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇60‎ Overhead bridges can be seen in many parts of Singapore, in the place where traffic is very heavy and crossing the road is 1 . ‎ These bridges can make people 2 roads safely. Overhead bridges are used in very much the same way as zebra crossings. ‎ They are more efficient (效率高的), 3 less convenient (方便的) because people have to climb up a lot of steps. This is inconvenient to the old. When people 4 an overhead bridge, they do not hold up (阻挡) traffic. But when they cross a 5 road using a zebra crossing, traffic is held up. This is 6 the government (政府) has 7 many overhead bridges to help people and 8 traffic moving at the same time. ‎ The government of Singapore has 9 a lot of money building these bridges. For their own safety, people should be given hope to use them 10 rushing across the road. Old people may find it a little 11 climbing up and down the steps, but it is still much safer than walking across the road 12 all the moving traffic. ‎ Overhead bridges are very useful. People, 13 old and young, should 14 use them. This will stop accidents 15 happening. ‎ ‎　　1. A. noisy B. not safe C. crowded D. not busy ‎ ‎　　2. A. cross B. crossing C. across D. through ‎ ‎　　3. A. though B. or C. if D. till ‎ ‎　　4. A. pass B. use C. visit D. build ‎ ‎　　5. A. wide B. narrow C. busy D. free ‎ ‎　　6. A. what B. why C. when D. where ‎ ‎　　7. A. made B. let C. built D. asked ‎ ‎　　8. A. see B. keep C. find D. feel ‎ ‎　　9. A. used B. made C. spent D. borrowed ‎ ‎　　10. A. full of B. fond of C. in spite of D. instead of ‎ ‎　　11. A. difficult B. different C. worried D. exited ‎ ‎　　12. A. past B. along C. about D. with ‎ ‎　　13. A. both B. either C. neither D. not ‎ ‎　　14. A. almost B. always C. nearly D. hardly ‎ ‎　　15. A. in B. at C. with D. from ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　新加坡，一个美丽的国家。但本篇着重介绍新加坡花费大量财力建筑立交桥，以及它们的利弊。最终得出结论，人们应该使用立交桥因为它们对防止交通事故的发生起很大的作用。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。本句是定语从句中的第二个小分句，做时特别要注意。意为“在交通拥挤和过马路不太安全的地方”。 ‎ ‎　　A。make sb. do sth. 其它词性不对。 ‎ ‎　　A。“效率高”与“不方便”意思上相反,故用though，有“尽管”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　B。 pass与bridge无法搭配,而visit ,build与bridge搭配意思不符。 ‎ ‎　　C。繁忙的马路。 ‎ ‎　　B。why引导表语从句，意为“这就是……的原因”。 ‎ ‎　　C。建造立交桥.。 ‎ ‎　　C。keep … doing 意为“让……一直干某事” 。 ‎ ‎　　B。spend…(in) doing 意为“在建立交桥上花费了大量的财力”。 ‎ ‎　　D。建立交桥一方面有利安全，另一方面帮助人们。所以人们应该使用它们，而不是横穿马路(有如在建立交桥之前)。instead of “而不是”，“代替”。 ‎ ‎　　A。 老人上下立交桥当然是有点困难，difficult形容词作宾语补足语。 ‎ ‎　　D。指过去没有立交桥时，既有人又有车辆过马路，with“伴有”，“带有”。 ‎ ‎　　A。两者都(老年人和年轻人)。 ‎ ‎　　B。建议人们应经常使用立交桥，其它选项在意思上都不对。 ‎ ‎　　D。固定短语stop sb. from doing，本句意为“阻止交通事故的发生。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇61‎ Bob: In a book I was reading, some men had to 1 a desert. There was nothing 2 sand they could see. It was so large 3 it seemed to them that it had almost no 4 . ‎ Tom: It 5 be very hot. ‎ Bob: That’s right. 6 hot in a desert. But they rested 7 the day and traveled at night. . ‎ Tom: But there’re no trees or anything like that 8 you to get cool. ‎ Bob: 9 . But they had some tents (帐篷). They 10 when they were going to rest. ‎ Tom: That was a lot of trouble, 11 ? ‎ Bob: Yes. Every night 12 they 13 on the next part of the trip, they had to take the tents 14 . Then they had to put them on their camels. That’s the 15 way you can travel in a desert. ‎ ‎　　1. A. go B. walk C. cross D. reach ‎ ‎　　2. A. for B. and C. else D. but ‎ ‎　　3. A. because B. that C. as D. enough ‎ ‎　　4. A. end B. water C. people D. animals ‎ ‎　　5. A. perhaps B. maybe C. sometimes D. must ‎ ‎　　6. A. It always is B. It’s always C. It never is D. It’s never ‎ ‎　　7. A. on B. at C. during D. until ‎ ‎　　8. A. for B. to C. will D. have ‎ ‎　　9. A. Yes B. No C. All right D. Very good ‎ ‎　　10. A. put up them B. put them up C. made them D built them ‎ ‎　　11. A. indeed B. too C. wasn’t it D. wasn’t that ‎ ‎　　12. A. when B. after C. before D. when ‎ ‎　　13. A. took B. got C. kept D. set out ‎ ‎　　14. A. away B. down C. up D. on ‎ ‎　　15. A. good B. first C. only D. strange ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文是一个对话，关于沙漠中人们如何旅行、如何休息，其中有大量的初中部分很重要的一些词组，如：so… that , must be , put sth. up。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。cross a desert 意为“穿越沙漠”。 ‎ ‎　　D。nothing but 是“除了……之外什么也没有”之意。 ‎ ‎　　B。固定词组，so… that …即“如此……以至于……”。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据上文，此处应选end 。 “ no end”意为“无边无际”。 ‎ ‎　　D。表示有把握的猜测，一定，肯定。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据常识，沙漠应该总是很热。 ‎ ‎　　C。during the day 在白天。 ‎ ‎　　A。for sb. to do sth. 全句意为“没有树或那样的东西让你纳凉”。 ‎ ‎　　B。 此句学生在做时，很容易根据中国人的思维。事实上，上文是一个否定句，如果是对整个否定句进行肯定回答，应用No，否则，用Yes。 ‎ ‎　　B。动词和副词构成的这类词组，如果所接宾语是代词必须放在这两个词之间， 如果是名词放中间，放在后面皆可。Put them up 意为“把他们支起，搭起”。 ‎ ‎　　C。这是一个反意疑问句，前部分是肯定句，所以后部分要用否定形式，而且主语用人称代词。 ‎ ‎　　C。联系上下文，意为“睡觉之前”。 ‎ ‎　　D。set out 意为”出发”。 ‎ ‎　　C。与上文的put them up相反，意为“收起帐篷”。 ‎ ‎　　C。唯一的方法。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇62‎ Mr. Miller had a shop in a big town. He 1 ladies’ clothes, and he always had two or three shop girls to 2 him. They were always 3 because they were cheaper than older women, but 4 of them worked for him for very 5 , because they were young, and they did not meet many boys in 6 shop. ‎ Last month a girl came to work for him. Her 7 was Helen, and she was very good. ‎ After a few days, Mr. Miller 8 a young man come into the shop. He went 9 to Helen, spoke to her for a few 10 and then went out of the shop. Mr. Miller was very 11 and when the young man 12 he went to Helen and said, “That young man didn’t 13 anything. What did he want to 14 ?” ‎ Helen answered, “He just wanted to see 15 .” ‎ ‎　　A. kept B. sold C. made D. mended ‎ ‎　　A. learn B. teach C. help D. follow ‎ ‎　　A. young B. strong C. clever D. boring ‎ ‎　　A. many B. most C. neither D. none ‎ ‎　　A. long B. much C. soon D. often ‎ ‎　　A. children’s B. men’s C. clothes D. women’s ‎ ‎　　A. friend B. parent C. sister D. name ‎ ‎　　A. realized B. guessed C. saw D. chose ‎ ‎　　A. away B. straight C. back D. by ‎ ‎　　A. words B. times C. things D. minutes ‎ ‎　　A. nervous B. pleased C. surprised D. interested ‎ ‎　　A. arrived B. left C. smiled D. finished ‎ ‎　　A. buy B. try C. treat D. touch ‎ ‎　　A. do B. take C. spend D. save ‎ ‎　　A. money B. nothing C. me D. nobody ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个幽默故事，故事简单明了，却说明了一个大家所共知的道理：异性相吸。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。根据常识，商店是“卖东西”而不是“保存东西”，“制造东西”或“修理东西”。 ‎ ‎　　C。指帮他在店中打点打点。 ‎ ‎　　A。从后面的older women得知。 ‎ ‎　　D。从上文but可知，没有一个姑娘为他工作很长时间。 ‎ ‎　　A。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据上文，这是一家卖女士服装的商店，所以其他都不可以。 ‎ ‎　　D。 ‎ ‎　　C。see sb. do sth.，此处意为看见有人进来。 ‎ ‎　　B。指年轻人径直走向Helen，故用straight，其他意思都不对。 ‎ ‎　　D。由于前面有介词for，所以不可用a few words，a few times，a few things.。For a few minutes 意为“跟她说了一会儿”。 ‎ ‎　　C。看到这种情景当然是感到好奇。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据常识，他须等年轻人离开才去问Helen。 ‎ ‎　　A。年轻人什么也不买。 ‎ ‎　　A。他想干什么呢？ ‎ ‎　　C。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇63‎ After her husband had gone to work, Mrs. Richards sent her children to school and went upstairs to her bedroom. She was too 1 to do any housework that morning, 2 in the evening she was going to an interesting fancy dress party (化装舞会) with her husband. What she 3 was a terrible genie (妖怪) and as she had made that special dress of hers the night before, she was anxious to try it on. 4 the dress was just a big piece of old cloth which was red, green, black and white, it would be very effective (有效的) to make her like a real genie. After putting it on, Mrs. Richards went downstairs happily. She wanted to find out 5 it would be comfortable to wear. ‎ Just as Mrs. Richards was entering the dining-room there was a 6 at the door. She thought that it 7 be the baker (面包师). She had told him to come straight in if she 8 to open the door and leave the bread on the kitchen table. Now not wanting to 9 the poor man, Mrs. Richards quickly 10 in the small storeroom under the stairs. She heard the front door open and a man came in. When Mrs. Richards 11 that it was the ‎ man from the electricity board (供电局) who had come to read the meter (电表), she walked out of the hiding-place on a sudden and tried to explain the matter, saying with a smile, “It’s only 12 ! It is not 13 for you to be 14 !” But it was too late. The man let out a sharp cry (发出尖叫) and jumped back several paces (步) . Then he ran away, 15 the door behind him with great force and noise. ‎ ‎　　A. angry B. ready C. frightened D. excited ‎ ‎　　A. for B. but C. so D. and ‎ ‎　　A. wanted to see B. wanted to play C. was afraid to see D. was afraid to play ‎ ‎　　A. Though B. But C. And D. If ‎ ‎　　A. that B. how C. whether D. when ‎ ‎　　A. knock B. voice C. man D. baker ‎ ‎　　A. may B. must C. wouldn’t D. couldn’t ‎ ‎　　A. not B. had C. tried D. failed ‎ ‎　　A. see B. frighten C. help D. scold (责怪) ‎ ‎　　A. went B. lay C. appeared D. hid ‎ ‎　　A. thought B. wondered C. imagined D. realized ‎ ‎　　A. me B. you C. game D. play ‎ ‎　　A. good B. necessary C. late D. early ‎ ‎　　A. off B. here C. afraid D. sorry ‎ ‎　　A. pushing B. locking C. knocking D. shutting ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个幽默故事，看后令人忍俊不禁。也许Mrs. Richards的化装技巧太捧了，也许，查表员的胆子也太小了——大白天的怎么可能有鬼呢？不过，如果你遇到这种情况，那会怎么样呢？ ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　D。一切准备就绪，只等去化装舞会了，所以该是激动得无法做家务。 ‎ ‎　　A。补充说明激动的原因，只有用for最为到位。 ‎ ‎　　B。本句是初中生不太熟悉的主语从句，play在这里是“扮演”的意思。意为“她所想扮演的是一个可怕的妖怪”。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据下文的意思，有转折关系，所以用though。 ‎ ‎　　C。她想看看是否穿着舒服。 ‎ ‎　　A。就在这时有敲门声。 ‎ ‎　　B。从下文可知她很有把握，“准是面包师”。 ‎ ‎　　D。fail to do sth. “没做成某事”。用not语法不对，而用had ,tried不符合意思 。 ‎ ‎　　B。她不想吓着这个人。 ‎ ‎　　D。因此，她就躲藏到楼梯下的贮藏室中。 ‎ ‎　　D。这时她才意识到自己的判断错误。 ‎ ‎　　A。只好出来解释，不是鬼怪，是她。故用It’s me 。 ‎ ‎　　B。13、14题是一个完整的句子。没必要害怕。 ‎ ‎　　C。 ‎ ‎　　D。分词充当伴随状语。意为随手就把门用力关上。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇64‎ Last Tuesday I took my two daughters, aged five and seven, to town by car. It began to rain 1 so I decided I would leave the children in the car before I went quickly into a shop. I 2 the girls not to touch anything and told them I would be 3 within a few minutes. Then I locked all the doors and left 4 happily looking out of the window. ‎ ‎ I returned to the car in less than five minutes but the girls had disappeared! I could hardly believe my 5 . The car doors were 6 locked, the windows were shut and on the back seat 7 only two coats. Being ‎ ‎8 , I ran to the corner of the street 9 there was no 10 of them .I rushed up to an old lady nearby and asked 11 she had seen two small girls but she said “No”. Feeling quick sick with fear, I sat on the driver’s seat, and 12 to stop trembling. Suddenly, I 13 a merry laugh behind me. I got out of the car, ran round to open the boot and there inside were two very red-faced and excited 14 . They had obviously pulled out the back seat, 15 behind it and then been unable to push the seat forward again. With tears in my eyes, I leaned forward and pulled their ears. ‎ ‎　　1. A. heavy B. hard C. hardly D. big ‎ ‎　　2. A. let B. warned C. allowed D. repeated ‎ ‎　　3. A. away B. out C. back D. alone ‎ ‎　　4. A. them B. her C. themselves D. herself ‎ ‎　　5. A. ears B. words C. eyes D. brains ‎ ‎　　6. A. too B. again C. already D. still ‎ ‎　　7. A. there B. sat C. seen D. were ‎ ‎　　8. A. excited B. proud C. frightened D. pleased ‎ ‎　　9. A. where B. which C. that D. when ‎ ‎　　10. A. warning B. sign C. body D. face ‎ ‎　　11. A. that B. when C. whether D. how ‎ ‎　　12. A. tried B. made C. tried not D. set ‎ ‎　　13. A. felt B. smelt C. saw D. heard ‎ ‎　　14. A. sons B. daughters C. women D. children ‎ ‎　　15. A. climbed B. flew C. threw D. landed ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文是一篇诙谐的故事，读来不禁使我们哑然失笑，为孩子们的天真无邪，也为母亲寻找孩子时的惊慌失措。其实，这一切都是真情流露。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。形容雨下的很大，要用hard 这个副词，故选B。 ‎ ‎　　B。本题疑点在于let和warned这两个词，但若用let 后要加动词　　　　　原形，而不是to do，故选B。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据句意选C，意为“我告诉他们说我一会儿就回来”。 ‎ ‎　　C。leave oneself 意为“把某人单独留下”。 ‎ ‎　　C。主人公回来后发现孩子们不见了，她感到很惊讶，故她不敢相　信她的眼睛，选C 。 ‎ ‎　　D。意为“车门跟她走时一样还是关着”。 ‎ ‎　　D。这是一个倒装句,谓语动词应于后面的名词一致, 故选D。 ‎ ‎　　C。当发现孩子们不见后她感到很害怕, 故选C。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据句意，本句是一个由where引导的地点状语从句，选A。 ‎ ‎　　B。没有他们的踪影。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据下文可知答案选C，意为“问她是否看见过两个小女孩”。 ‎ ‎　　A。意为“尽力停止颤抖”。 ‎ ‎　　D。听到了后面发出一阵笑声，选D。 ‎ ‎　　D。根据前面的修饰词和上文可知选D。 ‎ ‎　　A。根据四个单词的意思和句意，可知选A。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇65‎ ‎ There was a woman in Detroit, who had two sons. She was worried about them, especially the younger one, Ben, 1 he was not doing well in school. Boys in his class made joked about him because he seemed so 2 . ‎ ‎ The mother 3 that she herself would have to get her sons to do better in school. She told them to ‎ go to the Detroit Public Library to read a 4 a week and do a report about it for her. ‎ ‎ One day, in Ben’s 5 , the teacher held up a rock and asked if anyone knew it. Ben put up his hand and the teacher let him 6 . Why did Ben raise his hand? They wondered. He 7 said anything, what could he possibly want to say? ‎ ‎ Well, Ben not only 8 the rock; he said a lot about it. He named other rocks in its group and even knew 9 the teacher had found it. The teacher and the students were 10 . Ben had learned all this from doing one of his book 11 . ‎ ‎ Ben later went to the 12 of his class. When he finished high school, he went to Yale University and at last became one of the best doctors in the United States. ‎ ‎ After Ben grew up, he 13 something about his mother that he did not know as a 14 . ‎ ‎ She, herself, had never learned how to 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. because B. so C. but D. though ‎ ‎　　2. A. clever B. had C. slow D. quick ‎ ‎　　3. A. asked B. decided C. forgot D. heard ‎ ‎　　4. A. notice B. message C. book D. question ‎ ‎　　5. A. class B. room C. office D. lab ‎ ‎　　6. A. think B. leave C. stand D. speak ‎ ‎　　7. A. always B. even C. quickly D. never ‎ ‎　　8. A. found B. played C. knew D. threw ‎ ‎　　9. A. whether B. when C. where D. why ‎ ‎　　10. A. afraid B. surprised C. worried D. unhappy ‎ ‎　　11. A. pictures B. exercises C. shops D. reports ‎ ‎　　12. A. top B. end C. back D. side ‎ ‎　　13. A. learned B. remembered C. understood D. guessed ‎ ‎　　14. A. doctor B. child C. student D. teacher ‎ ‎　　15. A. read B. work C. teach D. show ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文介绍了美国一位平凡的母亲亲身教子的故事，父母是孩子的第一位教师，他们的一言一行深深地影响到孩子的成长和成材。文中的这位母亲通过自己的努力，使得智商不高的儿子成为栋梁之材，不能不使人沉思。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。从句意看应是因果关系, 所以用because。 ‎ ‎　　2.C．大家嘲笑Ben，显然是因为他反应比较迟钝，四个选项只有C 符合题义。 ‎ ‎　　3.C．从后面的一段话中，我们不难得知是她决定亲自指导她的儿子，故选B 。 ‎ ‎　　4.C．母亲叫他到图书馆读什么，我们从后面“Ben had knew it from doing one of his book…”可知是book。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。在课堂上。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。从上文可知老师让他发言。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。我们可知Ben 举手想回答老师的提问，而他一向迟钝, 这很反常。答案可知是D。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。从Ben的回答中我们可知他懂得一些关于那块石头的事，故选C。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。从句意看, 选C 最合适，意为“他还知道老师是在哪儿找到它的”。 ‎ ‎　　10.B．Ben的回答当然让大家很吃惊，故选B。 ‎ ‎　　11.D．从上文可知Ben读的是report。 ‎ ‎　　12.A．从后面Ben的表现可知，他应当成绩很好了，在班上遥遥领先。 ‎ ‎　　13.A．本题关键在于考查learn和understand 的区别，两个词的意思分别是“得知”和“理解”的意思，故选learn比较合适。 ‎ ‎　　14.B．作为一个小孩，他所不知道的一些事实。 ‎ ‎　　15.A．最后一句话道出事情的真相，所以选A。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇66‎ Why do people play football? It’s a(n) 1 game and it’s dangerous too. Twenty-two men fight 2 ninety minutes to make 3 many goals as they can. They get 4 black eyes, bruise (擦伤) and broken bones than they 5 points. Football players must be mad. ‎ And why do people watch football? They 6 be mad too. They certainly 7 and scream like 8 . I’m afraid 9 near a football field when they are playing a game. The crowds are 10 . ‎ ‎ I’d 11 stay at home and watch TV. But what happens when I turn it 12 ? They’re showing a football game. So I turn on the radio. What do I 13 ? The 14 football scores. And what do I see when I open a newspaper? Pictures of football players, interview(采访) with 15 players, scores of football games. ‎ ‎　　1. A. stupid B. funny C. exciting D. wonderful ‎ ‎　　2. A. for B. by C. in D. against ‎ ‎　　3. A. so B. to C. as D. very ‎ ‎　　4. A. much B. many C. most D. more ‎ ‎　　5. A. do with B. do C. do for D. did ‎ ‎　　6. A. mustn’t B. must C. can’t D. can ‎ ‎　　7. A. cry B. laugh C. run D. shout ‎ ‎　　8. A. gentlemen B. ladies C. madmen D. madams ‎ ‎　　9. A. of going B. for going C. to go D. to be going ‎ ‎　　10. A. happy B. dangerous C. sad D. tired ‎ ‎　　11. A. rather B. better C. like D. fairly ‎ ‎　　12. A. off B. down C. up D. on ‎ ‎　　13. A. listen B. listen to C. hear D. hear of ‎ ‎　　14. A. late B. latest C. later D. lately ‎ ‎　　15. A. basketball B. volleyball C. tennis D. football ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文用幽默的语气介绍了足球运动在社会上的地位和状况。读完令人感慨，人们真的为足球而疯狂了，足球无所不在。初中完形填空设计选项时，常会用障眼法迷惑学生，如本题中的第8项，解题时一定要小心。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。根据常识，足球是一项令人兴奋的运动，故选exciting。 ‎ ‎　　A。表示段时间的名词前常用介词for。 ‎ ‎　　C。as…as…是一个固定搭配。 ‎ ‎　　D。从than可知，此句应用比较级。 ‎ ‎　　C。do with 是“处理”的意思, 而do for 是“为……而做”的意思,故选C。 ‎ ‎　　B。根据句意应用肯定语气，后面出现了too，显然选B。 ‎ ‎　　D。shout 是“大叫”的意思，和句意相符。 ‎ ‎　　C。根据句意，他们象疯子一样大喊大叫，故选madmen。千万不要眼花看成madams。 ‎ ‎　　A。be afraid of 所接宾语若是可怕的事或物时通常是害怕做某事而引起不好的后果，be afraid to do不敢做某事，故选A。 ‎ ‎　　B。讲述我害怕站在足球场附近的原因，人群太危险了。 ‎ ‎　　A。would rather do“宁愿做某事”，would like和to搭配，had better是“最好”的意思，因此答案是A。 ‎ ‎　　D。turn on 是“打开”的意思，文中是打开电视，故选D。 ‎ ‎　　C。hear表示听到的结果，listen to表示听的动作，故选C。 ‎ ‎　　B。latest是“最近”，“最新”的意思, 符合题义。 ‎ ‎　　D。整篇文章讲的就是关于足球的事，故选D。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇67‎ ‎ Soon after Dave left university, one of his uncles, who was 1 and had no children of his own, died and 2 Dave a lot of money, so he decided to 3 his own company. ‎ ‎ He found a nice 4 , 5 some new furniture(家具)and 6 . He had only been there for a few hours 7 he heard someone come towards the door of his office. “It’s my first 8 ,” he thought. He quickly 9 the telephone, and 10 to be busy 11 an important call from someone in New York who wanted to buy a big and expensive house in the country. ‎ ‎ The man 12 at the door while seeing this was 13 , came in and waited politely for Dave to finish his 14 , then he said to Dave, “I’m from the telephone company, and I was sent here to 15 your telephone.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. ill B. rich C. honest D. luck ‎ ‎　　2. A. gave B. handed C. left D. promised ‎ ‎　　3. A. set up B. take up C. put up D. make up ‎ ‎　　4. A. office B. cinema C. theater D. school ‎ ‎　　5. A. bought B. carried C. managed D. lent ‎ ‎　　6. A. set in B. moved in C. moved out D. went out ‎ ‎　　7. A. as B. when C. while D. then ‎ ‎　　8. A. teacher B. boss C. customer (顾客) D. job ‎ ‎　　9. A. made up B. took up C. brought up D. pick up ‎ ‎　　10. A. pretended B. warned C. kept D. looked ‎ ‎　　11. A. writing B. answering C. calling D. saying ‎ ‎　　12. A. looked B. knocked C. hit D. waited ‎ ‎　　13.A. going on B. moving on C. speaking on D. keeping on ‎ ‎　　14. A. conversation B. gesture (手势) C. smoking D. fixing ‎ ‎　　15. A. repairing B. connecting C. making D. looking after ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文是一篇笑话，故事生动有趣，但读后又不禁感慨万分——自作聪明，终会留下笑柄。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。根据下文left him a lot of money 的提示, 我们可推断他叔叔很富有，故选B 。 ‎ ‎　　C。leave sb. sth. 是“留给某人某物”的意思, 故选C 。 ‎ ‎　　A。set up 是“建立”的意思，take up 是“举起”的意思，put up 是“张贴”的意思， make up 是“打扮”的意思, 根据句意和下文,可知选A。 ‎ ‎　　A。由下文可知选A 。 ‎ ‎　　A。意为“买了些新家具，然后就搬进去了”。 ‎ ‎　　B。move in 是“搬进”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　B。意为“就在这时”。 ‎ ‎　　C。Dave 开公司是为了接待顾客，因此选C 。 ‎ ‎　　D。take up 是“占据”的意思，bring up是“培养”的意思，make up 是“编造”的意思，pick up 是“随意拿起”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。假装忙于接一个重要的电话。 ‎ ‎　　B。answer a call 是“回电话”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　B。knock at door是“敲门”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。go on 是“继续”的意思, keep on 是“坚持”的意思, 故选A 。 ‎ ‎　　A。他拿起电话显然是讲话, 故选A 。 ‎ ‎　　A。全文的喜剧效果全在于此，很显然电话坏了，需要修理。Dave 只是在假装讲话。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇68‎ Many people think the 1 time is spent, the more work will be done. So students have to spend the whole 2 doing school work except the three meals. ‎ Modern students have many 3 . They love sports, computers and music. A 4 holiday can get them away from too much school work, and they can do 5 they like. But still teachers do not think about it. Because students have too much homework, they have no time to 6 themselves. Students are really tired 7 their weekend homework. So they don’t do it 8 Sunday night. And there is not enough time to finish the homework 9 . The poor weekend homework usually makes teachers 10 . ‎ Things always get 11 without right ideas. Too much school work makes students lose interest in learning. It’s also bad for their 12 . A horse runs faster after a 13 . But for students only rest is not enough. So such a condition (状况) should be 14 to give students both 15 and knowledge. ‎ ‎　　A. many B. much C. more D. most ‎ ‎　　A. week B. morning C. evening D. day ‎ ‎　　A. interests B. books C. pens D. friends ‎ ‎　　A. two days B. two-days C. two-day D. two-day’s ‎ ‎　　A. that B. if C. what D. when ‎ ‎　　A. learn B. enjoy C. teach D. look after ‎ ‎　　A. with B. of C. at D. for ‎ ‎　　A. in B. on C. after D. until ‎ ‎　　A. carefully B. angrily C. quickly D. fast ‎ ‎　　A. happy B. angry C. worried D. surprised ‎ ‎　　A. Better B. best C. worse D. worst ‎ ‎　　A. eyes B. ideas C. healthy D. health ‎ ‎　　A. meal B. rest C. moment D. while ‎ ‎　　A. changed B. kept C. taught D. made ‎ ‎　　A. food B. pleasure C. money D. time ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本篇是议论文，讲述了大家共知却又经常被老师所忽略的事实：务必让学生劳逸结合。的确，正如马休息过后可以跑得更快，学生在学习的过程中要适当休息才会学得更好。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。联系下文，the more time，the more work意为“花的时间越多，做的工作就越多”。 ‎ ‎　　D。从本句中的meals可知，指除了一天三餐，整天都花在功课上。 ‎ ‎　　A。从下文可知当今学生有许多兴趣，如，运动，电脑，音乐。 ‎ ‎　　C。固定短语a two-day holiday 或a two days’ holiday。 ‎ ‎　　C。宾语从句，以连词引导what意为“做他们所喜欢的事”。 ‎ ‎　　B。enjoy themselves 。 ‎ ‎　　B。be tired of 对…厌倦。 ‎ ‎　　D。not …until 作业到星期天晚上才做。 ‎ ‎　　A。本句是一个否定句，指学生没有足够的时间去仔细地做作业。 ‎ ‎　　B。学生匆匆忙忙所做的作业当然令老师很恼火。 ‎ ‎　　C。有事与愿违之意。即：不好好策划，事情总会变得更糟糕。 ‎ ‎　　D。太多的作业会使学生对学习失去兴趣，同时对他们的健康也有害。 ‎ ‎　　B。马在休息过后，会跑得更快。 ‎ ‎　　A。总结全文，这种现状必须改变。‎ ‎　　B。既给学生知识又给学生娱乐。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇69‎ During the war, an English pilot (飞行员) was hurt. But he was 1 by a group of nuns (修女). He had been very 2 and lost his sense. When he came to himself he was 3 to find a woman beside him. It was Sister Mary. She said to him, “This is a woman hospital. We will 4 you here as long as 5 , but you will have to follow our advice.” ‎ The pilot 6 to make himself up for a nurse. He could not talk with the nurses or the nuns. He had to stay in a small room as 7 as possible. He was asked to shave (刮胡子) every day, wearing a beautiful 8 , and the nurse’s uniforms (制服) . It was a very difficult time, however he didn’t feel very 9 especially when one of the nursing girls caught his eyes. She was very quiet, and ran away whenever she saw him looking at 10 . The pilot found 11 fall in love with her. ‎ One day he found the nurse working in the kitchen 12 . He went over to her and said, “Please don’t do that. I love you so much.” He started to put his arms 13 the nurse, and then drew back 14 . He found that the nurse was actually 15 pilot saved by the nuns just like himself. ‎ ‎　　A. caught B. saved C. killed D. helped ‎ ‎　　A. lucky B. hungry C. strong D. weak ‎ ‎　　A. angry B. sorry C. surprised D. worried ‎ ‎　　A. hide B. put C. take D. stop ‎ ‎　　A. possible B. able C. possibly D. need ‎ ‎　　A. decided B. liked C. agreed D. asked ‎ ‎　　A. soon B. much C. early D. late ‎ ‎　　A. clothes B. cap C. shoes D. sweater ‎ ‎　　A. lonely B. alone C. hungry D. hungrily ‎ ‎　　A. him B. me C. her D. she ‎ ‎　　A. her B. him C. herself D. himself ‎ ‎　　A. lonely B. loudly C. happily D. alone ‎ ‎　　A. behind B. in front of C. around D. on ‎ ‎　　A. happily B. sadly C. in surprise D. in danger ‎ ‎　　A. another B. the other C. others D. the others ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个关于战争的幽默，特殊的环境赋予了故事特殊的意义。读完后我们会笑，但更会感到悲哀，为那个飞行员，更为那个战争。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。根据上下文的联系，指飞行员被救。 ‎ ‎　　D。他受了伤，当然应该很虚弱。而不可能是lucky，hungry，strong . ‎ ‎　　C。按常理，人苏醒之后都会有吃惊的感觉。其他都非正常感觉。 ‎ ‎　　A。把飞行员藏在这里，其余的动词都不准确。 ‎ ‎　　A。as long as possible 固定短语“尽可能长”。 ‎ ‎　　C。也只好答应人家的要求。 ‎ ‎　　B。意为“尽可能多地呆在小房间里”。其他的选项虽没有语法错误，但不符合意思。 ‎ ‎　　B。clothes与 shoes 都是复数形式，不可能用在这里，sweater一般穿在里面，起不到伪装的作用。cap 最适当，因为护士都戴护士帽。 ‎ ‎　　A。虽然总是一个人，但倒也不感到孤单。 ‎ ‎　　C。飞行员看着“她”，用宾格 ‎ ‎　　D。飞行员发现自己爱上了这个女孩子。 ‎ ‎　　D。“她”独自一人，才可以向“她”表明心迹。Lonely“孤单地” alone“独自一人地” ‎ ‎　　C。抻出手臂抱着“她” ‎ ‎　　C。这时他才发现真相，所以很吃惊地把手缩了回 ‎ ‎　　A。another 另一个，the other 其他所有的，others别的人 ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇70‎ Crocodiles (鳄鱼) 1 their eggs and leave them under leaves or sand. Baby crocodiles use their teeth 2 their way out of the shells (壳). ‎ Crocodiles only live 3 it is hot. They are found in Australia 4 America. They spend most of 5 time lying around in the rivers. The crocodiles’ long tail 6 when the animal is swimming. It is an excellent weapon(武器). It 7 be used to strike (打击) the 8 . One blow will knock 9 a man or even a big animal at 10 . The crocodile has a hard neck. It cannot turn its 11 from side to side and so it can 12 see in front of itself. The crocodile has its teeth 13 by the crocodile bird. For its food this bird takes the bits in the crocodile’s mouth. This helps the crocodile a lot 14 it cannot move its tongue up and down. 15 its terrible teeth it catches its food. The food may be a fish, an animal, or even a careless man. ‎ ‎　　A. lay B. lie C. lain D. lying ‎ ‎　　A. to feel B. to turn C. to break D. to rush ‎ ‎　　A. when B. while C. where D. if ‎ ‎　　A. as B. and C. but D. so ‎ ‎　　A. its B. hot C. their D. cold ‎ ‎　　A. is used B. for help C. very useful D. be helpful ‎ ‎　　A. should B. can C. need D. must ‎ ‎　　A. friend B. enemy C. student D. family ‎ ‎　　A. soon B. far C. up D. down ‎ ‎　　A. most B. best C. once D. worst ‎ ‎　　A. tail B. head C. eyes D. body ‎ ‎　　A. not only B. still C. even D. only ‎ ‎　　A. pulled B. cleaned C. taken D. brushed ‎ ‎　　A. because B. so C. if D. whether ‎ ‎　　A. Under B. Between C. For D. With ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇文章主要讲述了鳄鱼的生活习性，你也许会感叹：大自然太神奇了！如果鳄鱼没有长长的尾巴，它拿什么作武器？如果鳄鱼能转动它的舌头，那鳄鱼鸟怎么生存？ ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。lay eggs产卵，下蛋lay-laid-laid。lie躺，位于lie-lay-lain，说谎lie-lied-lied。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。小鳄鱼破壳而出。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。鳄鱼住在热的地方。where引导地点状语。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。与前面的They对应。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。被用来。其他的选项有语法错误。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。can 表示一种能力，意为它的尾巴能用来攻击。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。敌人。 ‎ ‎　　9. D。knock down 撞倒。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。at most最多，at the best处于最佳状态，at once立刻,马上。根据意思应为“立刻把一个大的动物击倒”。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。根据上文脖子硬，那当然是头不能转动，而不可能是尾巴，眼睛或身体。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。而头不能转动，就意味着只能看前方的东西。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。have sth. done 让某事被做。Have its teeth cleaned 让鳄鱼鸟给它清洗牙齿。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。根据上下文之间的联系，这里是陈述为什么对它有帮助的原因，因此用because。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。固定搭配，意为“用牙齿”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇71‎ Granny Sarya lived outside Moscow. Her only son 1 to Afghanistan(阿富汗) and was killed in action there．Soon after that, her husband lost his job. The old man was always 2 food and clothes．And on a winter night he went out alone when Sarya was asleep. The next morning he was 3 dead in a cold lake. And his worn-out coat was 4 in a tree not far away. Sarya was so 5 that she nearly took her own life. ‎ ‎ Things got worse and worse after that. She always lived in hunger and cold. She had hoped that the government(政府) could help her but she 6 . ‎ ‎ It was a cold windy night. The old woman couldn’t 7 asleep at all. She had to get up. She decided to write a letter to God（神）, asking for 8 . She wished God to give her 100 rubles (卢布), so she could buy some food for herself. When she 9 writing it, she found she had no 10 . She had to put the 11 at a crossing. 12 the next morning a policeman found the letter. He read it to his comrades．They were all so 13 that they gathered some rubles and sent them to the poor old woman. ‎ ‎ At first Granny Sarya was happy. But after she 14 the money, she became 15 and said, “I’m told that all things that are touched by the policeman will be only a half left!” ‎ ‎　　1. A. sent B. ran away C. was sent D. escaped ‎ ‎　　2. A. worried about B. pleased with ‎ ‎　　C. thinking about D. hearing of ‎ ‎　　3. A. known B. found C. told D. fallen ‎ ‎　　4. A. put B. hanged C. shown D. hung ‎ ‎　　5. A. sad B. happy C. tired D. clever ‎ ‎　　6. A. succeeded B. failed C. won D. lost ‎ ‎　　7. A. go B. fall C. get D. help ‎ ‎　　8. A. coats B. food C. houses D. help ‎ ‎　　9. A. ended B. started C. finished D. enjoyed ‎ ‎　　10.A. stamp B. money C. pen D. paper ‎ ‎　　11.A. food B. letter C. coat D. rubles ‎ ‎　　12.A. Badly B. Carefully C. Luckily D. Wonderfully ‎ ‎　　13.A. excited B. moved C. amazed D. surprised ‎ ‎　　14.A. saw B. received C. gave D. counted ‎ ‎　　15.A. angry B. thankful C. helpful D. worried ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一个黑色幽默，饥寒交迫的老妇，万般无奈，只好求助于上帝，帮助她的不是上帝而是警察，可警察在人们心中的印象却是“凡被警察碰过的只有一半被留下”，可悲！ ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　C。被派去打仗了，要用被动语态。 ‎ ‎　　A。于是，老人总为自己的衣、食而担心。C很具有迷惑性。但它的意思指“考虑”，没有A准确。 ‎ ‎　　B。第二天，他被发现死在冰冷的湖里。 ‎ ‎　　D。他的衣服被挂在树上。hang – hanged –hanged 此时的hang 作“绞死”讲，hang – hung –hung 意为“悬挂”。 ‎ ‎　　A。儿子死了，丈夫没有了，此时她的心情唯有sad来描述。 ‎ ‎　　B。从but可知政府没有帮助她。fail“没成功”。 ‎ ‎　　B。fall asleep 固定短语，入睡。 ‎ ‎　　D。她需要食物，衣服，但不可以选A，B，C，而D的外延最广，她需要帮助。 ‎ ‎　　C。finish writing 写完信。 ‎ ‎　　A。发现自己没有邮票。从常识不难推断。 ‎ ‎　　B。上文所提及的那封信。 ‎ ‎　　C。这是一个巧合，当然对于老妇来说更是一种幸运。所以其他选项不符合意思。 ‎ ‎　　B。警察们被信的内容所感动。其他选项都不是他们看信后的心情。 ‎ ‎　　D。开始老人看到钱，当然很高兴，但开始数钱时，她不是这样想了。 ‎ ‎　　A。她认为警察把她的钱也给拿走了一半，所以生气。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇72‎ ‎ When it was over 20 years ago, I first met Mr. Andrews, my old headmaster. During the war (战争) I was studying at school in the north of England. My 1 had just returned to London, and there were not 2 schools left for children. My father had to go from one school to another, trying to 3 them to take me as a pupil. We had 4 to all the schools near our home, but no one would take me. 5 , we went to a school about five kilometers 6 form home. The headmaster kept us waiting for at least 7 . I could hear boys playing on the playground outside. ‎ When the headmaster’s secretary (秘书) let us 8 his office, Mr. Andrews said," 9 do you want to come here?" I had 10 of saying something about studying, 11 now I couldn’t remember anything, only thought of the boys playing outside. "I don’t know 12 in London," I said. "I’d like to play with 13 boys. I’ll read a lot of books, too." "All right," Mr. Andrews said. "We have one seat 14 ." My two years at that school were 15 the happiest of my life. ‎ ‎　　1. A. school B. family C. friends D. parents ‎ ‎　　2. A. good B. helpful C. cheap D. enough ‎ ‎　　3. A. make B. hope C. ask D. let ‎ ‎　　4. A. been B. gone C. walked D. got ‎ ‎　　5. A. In the end B. At first C. At once D. By then ‎ ‎　　6. A. far B. away C. back D. down ‎ ‎　　7. A. a while B. a minute C. an hour D. a day ‎ ‎　　8. A. in B. to C. inside D. into ‎ ‎　　9. A. What B. When C. Why D. How ‎ ‎　　10. A. remembered B. thought C. found D. heard ‎ ‎　　11. A. but B. and C. though D. so ‎ ‎　　12. A. anyone B. someone C. everyone D. no one ‎ ‎　　13. A. others B. other C. the others D. the other ‎ ‎　　14. A. more B. free C. each D. only ‎ ‎　　15. A. under B. inside C. above D. among ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　文章介绍了自己二十多年前，第一次遇到他的老校长的经历。应当说是一个很平凡的经历。但却深深地印在作者的脑海中，也许是因为它太平凡，也许是因为它是作者生活的转折点，也许……其实生活本来就是由无数个平凡所组成的。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据常识，应该是小孩随家人一起回到London。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。上文提及到因为战争，所以没有足够的学校供孩子们。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。无论是从意思上或语法上看，只有用ask，意为“请求他们把我收下”。let sb. do sth. , make sb. do sth. 没有 hope sb. to do sth.。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。had been too“去过”，had gone to“已经去了”，这是初中部分很重要的两个词组，中国学生特别容易混淆。而这里的意思说“我们去过我家附近的所有的学校。” ‎ ‎　　5. A。in the end 最终，at first 起初，at once 立刻，by then到那时为止。根据意思当然选A。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。five kilometers away from home 离家5公里处。这里很多学生会选far,事实上我们只能用副词away。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。从at least可知不选A或B，但根据上下文可知也不可能选D，c 最恰如其分 ‎ ‎　　8. D。这里强调“让我们走进他的办公室”。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。根据常识可知。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。由此可见作者知道校长大多要问这样的问题，也想出了一些回答方法。think of “想出”。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。从上下文的意思看是转折关系。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。此处只有用anyone，意为“谁也不认识”。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。 A和C绝不能用，因为后面有名词boys， the other表示“其他所有的男孩”，故也不能选。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。意为“还有空位子”。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。among the happiest of my life 意为“是我一生中最快乐的时候的一部分”。其他介词都不对。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇73‎ ‎ Ballpoint pens have made life easier for millions of people. At one time 1 did not like their students to 2 with pen. Perhaps it was because pens can leak(漏) and it is 3 to spill(溢出) the ink. And it is hard to write on thin or cheap paper with them. ‎ ‎ Ladislao Biro 4 for a newspaper in Budapest. He spent all day 5 his desk. Day in and day out, he corrected 6 of thin, cheap paper with a pen and ink. He often had to stop to 7 his pen and it did not write 8 on the thin paper. He and his brother George 9 some experiments. They wanted a pen that did not leak, with ink that did not spill. Why not 10 a little ball at the end? ‎ Two Englishmen, Henry Martin and Frederick Miles, like the 11 .It was the 12 of the Second World War. The Air Force 13 a non-leak, non-spill pen for the men to write with in 14 . Martin and Miles made and 15 many thousands of Biro “writing-sticks” to the Air Force. ‎ ‎　　1. A. factories B. schools C. shops D. restaurants ‎ ‎　　2. A. play B. write C. come D. meet ‎ ‎　　3. A. easy B. hard C. free D. popular ‎ ‎　　4. A. left B. waited C. looked D. worked ‎ ‎　　5. A. on B. near C. at D. in ‎ ‎　　6. A. mistake B. books C. pages D. diaries ‎ ‎　　7. A. mend B. fill C. brush D. change ‎ ‎　　8. A. well B. down C. out D. up ‎ ‎　　9. A. kept B. finished C. began D. studied ‎ ‎　　10.A. find B. wear C . grow D. use ‎ ‎　　11.A. matter B. result C. meaning D. idea ‎ ‎　　12.A. day B. time C. break D. year ‎ ‎　　13.A. bought B. took C. needed D. preferred ‎ ‎　　14.A. planes B. ships C. trains D. buses ‎ ‎　　15.A. sold B. lent C. moved D. passed ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇关于圆珠笔怎样发明使用的文章。由于钢笔易漏水给工作带来了许多不方便，通读此文，你就会明白圆珠笔在什么情况下发明推广使用。结合圆珠笔使用的方便和有关历史知识，能顺利完成短文。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。从上下文判断应选B。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。用笔写可用“write with pens”来表达。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。钢笔里的墨水容易从笔管溢出来，所以选A。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。指他在为一家报社工作。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。at one’s desk意思是“坐在桌前”。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。批改文稿可用correct pages来表达。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。往笔里装墨水可用fill the pen with ink。这里省略了with ink.。 ‎ ‎　　8. A。用副词well修饰动词write。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。由于他发现用钢笔写有麻烦，所以他和朋友开始做实验，想更好的方法。 ‎ ‎　　10 .D。Why not +动词原形。 ‎ ‎　　11. D。他们喜欢他的设想。 ‎ ‎　　12. B。the time of 表示“……的时候”。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。指当时空军正需要这样的笔。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。句意理解和实际判断想结合。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。他们生产并销售圆珠笔供空军使用，故选sold。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇74‎ The generation gap（代沟）has become a 1 problem. I read a 2 about it in the newspaper. Some children have killed themselves after quarrels（争吵）with 3 . I think this is because they don’t often have a talk with each other. Parents now 4 more time in the office, 5 they don’t have much time to 6 with their children. As time passes, they 7 feel that they don’t have the 8 topics（话题）to talk 9 . I want to tell parents to be more with your 10 , get to know them and 11 them. And for children, show your 12 to your parents. They are the people who 13 you. So 14 them your thoughts（想法）. In this way, you 15 have a better understanding of each other. ‎ ‎　　1. A. serious B. wonderful C. necessary D. thankful ‎ ‎　　2. A. message B. call C. report D. letter ‎ ‎　　3. A. friends B. teachers C. classmates D. parents ‎ ‎　　4. A. spend B. stay C. work D. have ‎ ‎　　5. A. because B. if C. but D. so ‎ ‎　　6. A. study B. do C. stay D. shop ‎ ‎　　7. A. neither B. either C. all D. both ‎ ‎　　8. A. interesting B. same C. true D. good ‎ ‎　　9. A. about B. of C. in D. above ‎ ‎　　10. A. business B. children C. work D. office ‎ ‎　　11. A. get on with B. look after C. understand D. love ‎ ‎　　12. A. interest B. secret C. trouble D. feelings ‎ ‎　　13. A. hate B. love C. live D. speak ‎ ‎　　14. A. tell B. ask C. answer D. say ‎ ‎　　15. A. can B. should C. must D. would ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇文章讲的是关于大家都知道但都不知道该如何处理的一个问题——代沟。代沟时时处处都有，怎样对待它？作者给了我们一点较好的建议，相互理解，换位思考，相信这个世界一定会变得更美丽。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　A。很显然代沟已经是一个很严重的问题。 ‎ ‎　　C。从下文可知这是报纸上的一篇报道。 ‎ ‎　　D。这篇文章是关于代沟的问题，所以应该是孩子和父母吵架后自杀，而不是和其他人。 ‎ ‎　　A。stay， work 不可能与time组成词组，have time不符合上下文的意思。因此用spend，意为把更多的时间花在工作上。 ‎ ‎　　D。本句与下文的关系是因果关系。 ‎ ‎　　C。本句意为“因此就没有许多时间和小孩呆在一起，这样就会产生代沟”（与文章所谈论的话题相符）。所以不可能选其他选项。 ‎ ‎　　D。指父母与小孩双方都有这样的感觉。 ‎ ‎　　B。没有共同的话题。其他选项虽无语法错误，但不符合文章的意思。 ‎ ‎　　A。the same topics to talk about，这里动词不定式充当定语修，饰前面的名词，同时the same topics又是about的宾语。意为所谈论的话题。 ‎ ‎　　B。当然应是多和小孩子一起。 ‎ ‎　　C。这几个词组放在这儿都没有语法错误，父母一般说来都要和小孩相处（A）、照顾他们（B）、爱他们（D），但作者的意思是父母要理解小孩。 ‎ ‎　　D。把自己的感觉告诉给父母。 ‎ ‎　　B。从常识不难推断。意为“他们是爱你们的人”。 ‎ ‎　　A。把你们的内心所想告诉他们。say在这里有语法错误，ask与answer意思不对。 ‎ ‎　　A。这样你们才会更好地相互理解。这里强调“会，能”，故用can 。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇75‎ Paris has a beautiful name, the City of 1 . Do you know 2 it means? Many beautiful buildings are lighted at 3 .The streets are very 4 .When you 5 in Paris, you must not turn 6 your headlights （汽车前灯）even after dark. Paris is full of life all day and all night. But this is not the 7 reason（原因）for its beautiful name. For hundreds of years, Paris has been the centre of science and art. 8 scientists and artists have come to 9 here. For this reason also, people 10 it the City of Lights. ‎ ‎　　1. A. Flowers B. Cars C. Lights D. Rivers ‎ ‎　　2. A. what B. how C. where D. when ‎ ‎　　3. A. noon B. night C. day D. evening ‎ ‎　　4. A. black B. dark C. noisy D. bright ‎ ‎　　5. A. walk B. go C. drive D. live ‎ ‎　　6. A. off B. down C. out D. on ‎ ‎　　7. A. only B. other C. any D. another ‎ ‎　　8. A. No B. Few C. Many D.A few ‎ ‎　　9. A. study B. drive C. play D. have dinner ‎ ‎　　10. A. make B. call C. build D. find ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇描述巴黎景观的短文，文章抓住了该城的一个特色——灯城来展开描述，虽只有两段文字，却包含了丰富的内涵 。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。看文章的首句和尾句之后，此空便可迎刃而解。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。"what...mean"这是习惯性搭配。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。灯要在夜里开，evening虽为"晚上"之意，但不可与at搭配。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。顺承上文华灯竞开，自然亮如白昼。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。不看下一句，似乎4个选项均成立，但下文提到车灯，自然应选驾车。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。由于街上十分明亮， 即使天黑了也不必开车灯。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。文章最后又提出一个原因， 说明不是唯一的原因才对。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。 从上文可知用many。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。由于巴黎乃世界科学和艺术中心， 因此吸引了许多科学家和艺术家来此学习和研究。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。习惯用法。注意最后的lights显然不是指具体的灯，而是指"显赫人物；名家；名流"。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇76‎ Football is, I do think, the most favourite game in England: one has only to go to one of the important 1 to see this. Rich and poor, young and old, one can see them all there 2 for one side or the 3 .To a stranger（陌生人）,one of the most surprising things about football in 4 is the great knowledge of the game ‎ which 5 the smallest boy seems to have. He can tell you the names of the 6 in most of the important teams, he has 7 of them and knows the results of large numbers of matches. He will tell you who he 8 will win such a match, and his ideas about 9 are usually as good as those of men three or four times his 10 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. cities B. matches C. teams D. places ‎ ‎　　2.A. waiting B. looking C. asking D. shouting ‎ ‎　　3.A. other B. same C. team D. players ‎ ‎　　4.A. China B. the USA C. England D. Canada ‎ ‎　　5.A. all B. hardly C. only D. even ‎ ‎　　6.A. players B. cities C. countries D. matches ‎ ‎　　7.A. names B. pictures C. heard D. thought ‎ ‎　　8.A. says B. asks C. decides D. hopes ‎ ‎　　9.A. England B. players C. football D. men ‎ ‎　　10.A. ideas B. age C. stories D. education ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇以情景推理的语境题目为主的完形填空，它谈到了英国人对足球的狂热程度，这方面背景知识的 了解会大大有助于该题的解答。全文内容紧密结合英美人生活实际，足球乃世界第一大球，在英国，人们日常生活的话题除了天气之外， 大概谈的最多的就是足球了，只要理解了这一点，结合上下文的语言环境，分析好句法关系，应该能够应付自如。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。从to see this和常理可以判断出去看的是比赛，而非其他。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。指球迷们激动的场面：大声叫喊。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。看球的人为一方或另一方而呐喊助威， 这种球迷的狂热劲应有所闻，也不难理解。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。短文讲的就是英国人对足球的狂热。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。在这个长句中，主语one后带有一个"of"短语，而表语后带有"of短语＋定语从句"，文章首 句已点明本文谈的是英国，对一个陌生人来说，英国足球最让人拍案称奇的是，甚至小孩子也会对足球知之甚多。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。指球队队员。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。这是一个由三个分句连接的并列句，tell，has， knows的内容根据常识不难判断，这就是说这 些小孩子能告诉你大多数重要球队所有队员的名字，而且还有他们的照片，知道许多场比赛的结果。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。他们希望哪个队会赢。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。从上下文便知。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。这是一个包含两个复杂分句的并列句， 中间由and连接，填空处8 he hopes系插入语，即He will tell you(he hopes) who will win...；后一分句是包含同级比较be as good as的句子。9空处指"评球 "才合适，全句意为：他会告诉你，他希望这场那场比赛中谁赢，而他关于足球的观点通常同成年人一样好， 那些成年人的年龄比他们大两、三倍。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇77‎ ‎ Do you know how to study better and make your study more effective(有效的) We all know that Chinese students usually study very hard for long 1 . This is very good, but it doesn’t 2 a lot, for an effective students must have enough sleep, enough food and enough rest and exercise. Every day you need to go out for a walk or visit some friends or some nice places. It’s good for your study. ‎ ‎ When you return 3 your studies, your mind will be refreshed(清醒) and you’ll learn more 4 study better. Psychologists(心理学家) 5 that learning takes place in this way. Here take English learning 6 an example. First you make a lot of progress and you feel happy. Then your language study seems 7 the same. So you will think you’re learning 8 and you may give up. This can last for days or every weeks, yet you ‎ needn’t give up. At some point your language study will again take another big 9 . You’ll see that you really have been learning all along. If you get enough sleep, food, rest and exercise, studying English can be very effective and 10 . Don’t give up along the way. Learn slowly and you’re sure to get a good result. ‎ ‎　　1. A. days B. time C. hours D. weeks ‎ ‎　　2. A. help B. give C .make D. take ‎ ‎　　3. A. after B. for C. at D. to ‎ ‎　　4. A. yet B. and C. or D. but ‎ ‎　　5. A. have found B. have taught C. told D. said ‎ ‎　　6. A. with B. for C. as D. to ‎ ‎　　7. A. to have B. to make C. to take D. to stay ‎ ‎　　8. A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎ ‎　　9. A. work B. jump C. walk D. result ‎ ‎　　10. A. hard B. common C. interesting D. possible ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文告诉我们学习必须要有好的方法，劳逸结合，高效出成果。读后把它用到学习中去, 时刻提醒自己。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。表示一端时间，time是可数名词，可以说 for a long time，除此，只能选择C项。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。句意是“帮助不大”， help 符合句意。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。return后跟介词 to搭配。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。此处learn more 与study better为并列关系，用 and。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。Psychologists 的发现，用动词find。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。注意下面表示“以……为例”的表达法的区别： take ……for example, take……as an example，关键是那个 an。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。stay表示“保持原状”，是联系动词。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。通过上下文stay the same和 give up，判断是“没有学到知识”。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。take a big jump 意思是“发生很大的飞跃”。 ‎ ‎　　10. C。与effective相互应的褒义词是 interesting。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇78‎ ‎ Mr. Evans lives in a city. He was a math 1 three years ago. He taught well and his students 2 him. So he decided to work in the middle school all his life. But an accident 3 everything. ‎ ‎ One spring he took his class to 4 a place of interest. The children saw a lot of 5 things and had a good time there. But on their way to school, their 6 hit by a truck because the young driver was drink. Five students 7 and more than half of the children were badly __8 in the accident. He didn’t know how it had happened and was __9 it and after he came out of hospital, he left the school and became a __10 . He tried his best to stop the drivers breaking the traffic rules. He worked hard and was strict with the drivers. So they are afraid of him. ‎ ‎ One afternoon it was very hot. Mr. Evans was 11 . He was standing at the crossing and watching the traffic. Suddenly he saw a __12_ rushing towards the crossing. It ran so fast that it almost hit a man __13 a bike. He stopped it at once and saw a girl in it. “ 14 your licence to me, madam,” said Mr. Evans. ‎ ‎ The girl passed her bag on to him and said, “Please look for it in it 15 . I can’t see anything without glasses.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. worker B. teacher C. doctor D. farmer ‎ ‎　　2. A. liked B. wished C. helped D. answered ‎ ‎　　3. A. beat B. won C. lost D. changed ‎ ‎　　4. A. build B. break C. visit D. find ‎ ‎　　5. A. pleasure B. dangerous C .safe D. interesting ‎ ‎　　6. A. bus B. train C. car D. ship ‎ ‎　　7. A. left B. lived C. died D. fell ‎ ‎　　8. A. hot B. hurt C. touched D. stopped ‎ ‎　　9. A. sad about B. afraid of C .worried about D .pleased with ‎ ‎　　10. A. soldier B. policeman C. bookseller D. cleaner ‎ ‎　　11. A. in the horne B. at home C .on duty D. in the office ‎ ‎　　12. A .runner B. policeman C. player D. car ‎ ‎　　13. A. riding B. selling C. buying D. making ‎ ‎　　14. A. Throw B. Show C. Lend D. Write ‎ ‎　　15. A. you B. I C . yourself D. myself ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文讲的是一位老师在带学生参观的途中，由于司机酒后驾驶出了事故，造成五位学生死亡。他决心离开学校当警察，查处违规司机。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。上文说：他教得好。推断：他是个老师。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。从上句推断：他教得好，学生当然喜欢他。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。从下文发生的交通事故使他不做老师改当警察来推断，故选change。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。他带学生参观。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。下文说：他们玩得痛快。推断：看到许多有趣的事。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。car 学生们外出参观坐bus。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。车祸中五名学生死了。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。车祸中半数学生受伤。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。事故大，老师当然难过。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。老师深恶痛绝司机的违章，故离开学校，当了警察。 ‎ ‎　　11. C。这天埃文斯当班。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。从上下文判断，这是一辆轿车。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。这里谈到的交通。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。埃文斯要看她的驾驶证。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。那女司机要他自己看。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇79‎ ‎“Where is the university(大学)?” This is a question that many visitors to Cambridge（剑桥）ask. But no one can give them a __1__ answer, for there is no wall to be found __2__ the university. The university is the city. You can find classroom buildings, __3__, museums and offices of the university all over the city. And most of __4__ members are the students and __5__ of the thirty-one colleges（学院）. ‎ ‎　　Cambridge was already a __6__ town long before the first students and teachers arrived 800 years __7__. It grew up by the river Granta, and the river was once __8__the Cam. A __9__ was built over the river as early as 875. __10__ the town got its name "Cambridge". ‎ ‎　　In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries more and __11__ land was used for college buildings. The town grew much __12__ in the nineteenth century after the opening of the railway in 1845. Cambridge became a __13__ ‎ in 1951 and now it has a population of over 100, 000. Many young students in __14__ countries __15__ to study at Cambridge. Thousands of people from all over the world come to visit the university town. It has become a famous place all around the world. ‎ ‎　　1. A. clean B. clear C. right D. real ‎ ‎　　2. A. around B. in C. near D. by ‎ ‎　　3. A. cinemas B. parks C. zoos D. libraries ‎ ‎　　4. A. their B. his C. its D. my ‎ ‎　　5. A. parents B. farmers C. workers D. teachers ‎ ‎　　6. A. interesting B. usual C. developing D. common ‎ ‎　　7. A. before B. ago C. later D. after ‎ ‎　　8. A. said B. called C. spoken D. talked ‎ ‎　　9. A. bridge B. building C. station D. house ‎ ‎　　10. A. Because B. But C. And D. So ‎ ‎　　11. A. less B. fewer C. more D. bigger ‎ ‎　　12. A. smaller B. slower C. faster D. cleaner ‎ ‎　　13. A. city B. college C. university D. country ‎ ‎　　14. A. another B. other C. the other D. others ‎ ‎　　15. A. stop B. hate C. hope D. need ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文是关于世界闻名的大学——剑桥大学的发展及其现状。城市即大学，大学即城市，谁也说不清哪儿是大学，哪儿是城市。真是一个令人向往城市，——不，真是一个令人向往的大学。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　B。谁也不能给出一个明确的答案。 ‎ ‎　　A。大学周围没有围墙。 ‎ ‎　　D。四个选项中，只有libraries属于大学里的设施之一。 ‎ ‎　　C。用its代指the city’s。 ‎ ‎　　D。四个选项中，只有teachers属大学里的成员之一。 ‎ ‎　　C。整句话的意思为“剑桥早在800年前就是一个发展中的城镇了。 ‎ ‎　　B。 ‎ ‎　　B。这个城镇过去被叫做…… ‎ ‎　　A。建在河上的理应是桥。 ‎ ‎　　D。很明显的因果关系。因此用so。 ‎ ‎　　C。more and more意为“越来越多”。 ‎ ‎　　C。发展得快。 ‎ ‎　　A。从城镇变成了一个城市。 ‎ ‎　　B。其他的国家。 ‎ ‎　　C。其他国家的学生都希望到剑桥来学习。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇80‎ It was about two in the morning when I returned home. I tried to __1_ up my wife by 2 the doorbell, but she was fast 3 , so I got a ladder and put it 4 the wall and began 5 towards the bedroom window,. I was almost there when a man’s 6 below said, “I don’t think the windows need cleaning at this 7 of the night.” I looked down and 8 fell off the ladder when I saw a policeman. I at once 9 answering in the way I 10 , but is said. “I enjoy 11__ windows at night.” “ 12 do I,” answered the policeman in the same tone. “Excuse my interrupting you, but would you mind 13 with me to the station?” “Sorry,” I said. “You see, I’ve 14 my key.” “Your __15 ?” called. “My key!” I shouted. Luckily ‎ my wife got up and opened the window just as the policeman started to climb towards me. ‎ ‎　　1.A. wake B. get C. ask D. hitting ‎ ‎　　2. A. knocking B. pushing C. ringing D. hitting ‎ ‎　　3. A. out B. asleep C. answering D. away ‎ ‎　　4. A. to B. in C. by D. against ‎ ‎　　5. A. jumping B. climbing C. walking D. running ‎ ‎　　6. A. voice B. speech C. sound D. noise ‎ ‎　　7. A. day B. o’clock C. time D. place ‎ ‎　　8. A. already B. just C. quickly D. nearly ‎ ‎　　9. A. regretted B. couldn’t help ‎ ‎　　C. finished D. gave up ‎ ‎　　10. A. climbed B. did C. went D. returned ‎ ‎　　11. A. sweeping B. cleaning C. breaking D. looking up ‎ ‎　　12. A. Like B. As C. Too D. So ‎ ‎　　13. A. coming B. come C. to come D. came ‎ ‎　　14. A. missed B. brought C. forgotten D. found ‎ ‎　　15. A. Whose B. Which C. Why D. What ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　“我”深夜回家，无法进屋，只好爬窗，巧遇警察。“我”和警察的对话，生动幽默。短文常用短语较多，完成空格时多加注意。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。“叫醒某人”应表达为wake up sb. or wake sb. up。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。ring the bell（按门铃）是常用短语。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。fast asleep表示“睡得很熟”。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。against the wall表示“靠墙”。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。梯子放好了就往上爬。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。作者爬窗户时，听到下面有个男人的说话声。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。at this time 表示“此刻”。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。作者回头看见警察时，差一点儿摔下梯子。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。couldn’t help doing something表示“禁不住做什么”。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。did = answered。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。作者说：我喜欢夜里擦窗户。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。警察说：So do I =我也喜欢夜里擦窗户。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。mind + doing something 是常用搭配。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。 从作者的上述表现来看，他的确把钥匙给忘了。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。下文说：我的钥匙！推断上文：你的什么？‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇81‎ Mary and Peter were having a picnic near a river when Mary noticed something flying overhead.“ 1 ,” she shouted to her friends. “ That’s a spaceship up there and it’s going to 2 here.” ‎ ‎ Frightened(吓唬) by the strange silver colored spaceship, 3 of the young people got in their 4 and drove away quickly. Peter __5_ Mary and always close to her. They, more 6 than frightened, watched the spaceship land, saw a door open. When nobody 7 , they went to the spaceship and looked into。In the center of the floor 8__ was a pile of food. Peter followed Mary into the spaceship and didn’t __9_ the door close behind him. The temperature fell quickly and the __10 young people lost consciousness(知觉). ‎ ‎ When they woke up, they were 11 to see that they were back by the river 12 . The spaceship ‎ had gone. Their car was nearby. ‎ ‎ “What 13 ?” said Mary. ‎ ‎ “Don’t ask me; perhaps we had a 14 .” Peter said slowly. “Did you … did you see a spaceship?” ‎ ‎ “Yes,” said Mary. “Oh, Peter, we 15 have seen a UFO coming from another world.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. Look B. Come C. Stop D. Stand ‎ ‎　　2. A. arrive B. come C. land D. leave ‎ ‎　　3. A. none B. some C. many D. most ‎ ‎　　4. A. cars B. rooms C. houses D. buses ‎ ‎　　5. A. knew B. liked C. saw D. met ‎ ‎　　6. A. afraid B. worried C. careful D. curious (好奇) ‎ ‎　　7. A. come along B. came over ‎ ‎　　C. came out D. came round ‎ ‎　　8. A. it B. there C. that D. this ‎ ‎　　9. A. know B. think C. hear D. hope ‎ ‎　　10. A. two B. three C. four D. five ‎ ‎　　11. A. happy B. surprised C. interested D. ready ‎ ‎　　12. A. again B. too C. later D. finally ‎ ‎　　13. A. started B. stopped C. happened D. landed ‎ ‎　　14. A. rest B. dream C. drink D. walk ‎ ‎　　15. A. could B. would C. should D. must ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇科幻短文。彼得和玛丽在河边野餐时遇不明飞行物，不知不觉中进了飞船，便很快失去了知觉。醒来时又回到了原地，就好像做了一场梦。故事连贯性强，要通过上下文的理解才能顺利完成。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。提示某人看，故用look。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。从上文的描述中可以推断： 宇宙飞船将要着陆。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。上文说：突如其来的飞船使大家非常害怕，理所当然，人人都要逃离。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。从drove away中可以得到提示。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。下文说：彼得 always close to her。这说明：彼得喜欢玛丽。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。他们两人也害怕，但好奇心更为强烈，故选D。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。上文说：他们看见宇宙飞船的门开了。推断下文：但里面没有人出来。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。这里是个 there be句型。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。彼得跟随玛丽进了宇宙飞船，但是他们没有听见关门的声音。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。Peter+ Mary=two young people。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。进了宇宙飞船，怎么现在又回到了原处，这使他们二人感到惊讶。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。原来在河边，现在又回到了河边。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。玛丽问：怎么回事？ ‎ ‎　　14. B。彼得也闹不清是怎么回事，于是他说：我们也许是做了个梦。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。肯定判断用must，否定判断用can’t ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇82‎ The Inspector of Schools arrived yesterday morning, and he spent the whole day examining the classes. The headmaster had told us a few days __1 that he was coming. I think the headmaster was very 2 about it, for every day, he came to all the classes, 3 the teachers over and over again what they must do and examined the boys himself to see __4_ they were ready for the inspector. He told us in our class that we were all fools and would be sure to make him lose face before the inspector. All this made us very nervous; and when the 5 walked into our class we were all very afraid. I felt that all I 6 knew had gone clean out of my 7 . The inspector is a tall man. He wears glasses and always ‎ looks very strict. He 8 on examining the class in English, and I was asked to read. I felt very nervous, but I got 9 without any bad mistakes. Some of the other boys, 10 , did not do well and the inspector 11 serious, though he did not say 12 . We got along with history and geography; but when it came to math, he set us some very 13 problems to solve which we failed to do; so he looked very angrily at our teacher. Our teacher was very 14 with us later; but I am sure we should have done better if we had not been so afraid. I think I should like to be 15 when I grow up, because everyone should be afraid of me. ‎ ‎　　1. A before B. after C. ago D. later ‎ ‎　　2. A. nervous B. angry C. afraid D. sure ‎ ‎　　3. A. asked B. needed C. promised D. told ‎ ‎　　4. A. whether B. how C. why D. that ‎ ‎　　5. A. teacher B. students C. headmaster D. inspector ‎ ‎　　6. A. never B. often C. ever D. even ‎ ‎　　7. A. hand B finger C. heart D mind ‎ ‎　　8. A. finished B. stopped C. kept D. went ‎ ‎　　9. A. on B. through C. down D. out ‎ ‎　　10. A. but B. however C. though D. whatever ‎ ‎　　11. A. looked B. felt C. seemed D. sounded ‎ ‎　　12. A. little B. many C. much D. few ‎ ‎　　13. A. easy B. hard C. interesting D. simple ‎ ‎　　14. A. pleased B. surprised C. angry D. strict ‎ ‎　　15. A. a teacher B. an officer C. an inspector D. a headmaster ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　督学要来学校检查教学工作，校长、老师和学生们都很害怕。由于同学们上课很紧张，不能正确的解题、答题，老师受到责备。“紧张”贯穿全文，完成短文时要抓住人物的心理活动。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。（督学来到的）几天前，the headmaster就告诉了我们他要来。此空由前面的过去完成时决定。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。the headmaster 对此事很担心，C有一定的干扰性，从后文他每天做的事来看，不是害怕。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。他一遍又一遍地告诉他们应该干些什么。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。whether用来连接宾语从句。 the headmaster想知道孩子们是否作好了准备。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。根据上下文推出要来班上视察的人。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。ever表示“曾经”。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。由于紧张推理出：我感到我所知道的都从我头脑中丢干净了。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。keep doing sth. 不停地做某事。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。get through指通过阅读检测，其它选项都不能表现这一点。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。从did not go so well看，此空表示转折。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。督学看起来很严肃，作者在此是说，看到如此多学生回答不好，督学的脸色很难看，因此用looked。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。much修饰不可数名词，这里代所说的话。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。hard 在此相当于difficult，选择此空时要注意前面的转折词。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。 因为督学looked very angrily at our teacher ，因此our teacher 把气都撒在了我们身上。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。看到督学来到后老师学生们的紧张表现，“我决定长大后要当督学。”‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇83‎ Washoe is a young chimpanzee(黑猩猩). She is no 1 chimpanzee, though. Scientists are doing research(研究) 2 her. They want to see how civilized(驯化) she can 3 . Already she can do many things as human being does. ‎ ‎ For example, she has been learning how to exchange 4 with people. The scientists are teaching her 5 language. When she wants to be picked 6 , Washoe points up with one finger. She rubs her teeth with her finger 7 she wants to brush her teeth. This is done after every meal. ‎ ‎ Washoe has also been trained to find answers to problems. Once she was put in a room with food hanging from the top. It was too high to 8 . After she thought about the problem, she got a tall box to stand 9 . The food was still too high to be reached. Washoe found a long stick. Then she climbed onto the 10 , caught the stick and 11 down the food with the stick. ‎ ‎ Washoe 12 like a human, too. The scientists keep her in a fully furnished(布置好家俱的) house. After a hard 13 in the lab, she goes home. There she plays with her toys. She 14 watches television before going to bed. ‎ ‎ Scientists hope to 15 more about people by studying our closest relative---the chimpanzee. ‎ ‎　　1. A. foolish B. simple C .real D. ordinary ‎ ‎　　2. A. for B. on C .to D. by ‎ ‎　　3.Ａ.experience B. change C. produce D. become ‎ ‎　　4. A. actions B. ideas C. messages D. feelings ‎ ‎　　5. A. human B. sign C. mother D. animal ‎ ‎　　6. A. out B. at C. on D. up ‎ ‎　　7. A. when B. until C. since D. while ‎ ‎　　8. A. pull B. see C. eat D. reach ‎ ‎　　9. A. by B. on C up D. with ‎ ‎　　10. A. wall B. box C. top D. stick ‎ ‎　　11. A. knocked B. picked C. took D. looked ‎ ‎　　12. A. lives B. works C. thinks D. plays ‎ ‎　　13. A. task B. lesson C. journey D. day ‎ ‎　　14. A .quite B. already C .even D. still ‎ ‎　　15. A. see B. answer C. learn D. copy ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　黑猩猩和人类有很近的关系。科学家们想通过研究黑猩猩从而更好的了解人类。他们做了一系列的实验来证明黑猩猩和人一样有很强的模仿能力。答题时要围绕黑猩猩模仿人动作的几个片段，进行合理推断。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. D。突出猩猩的不一般。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。do research on 意思是“对……做出研究”。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。经过驯化，猩猩会有什么转变。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。语言的主要作用是交流信息。通过交流，体验感受。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。下文提到的都是有关sign language。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。pick up意思是“抱起，捡起”。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。跟上句when引导的状语从句相对称。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。reach 有“够到”、“到达”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。 为了够到东西，猩猩要站到上面。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。从前句推知，猩猩爬到箱子上。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。猩猩准备用棒子敲一下食物。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。下文提到的都是有关猩猩生活方面的情况，故选live.。 ‎ ‎　　13. D。要让猩猩适应住在有家俱的房子里，必须训练一段时间。从时间段来，用 “day”好。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。猩猩经过训练，知道睡前要关电视。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。learn 有“了解、学会”等意思 ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇84‎ The United States covers a large part of the North 1__ continent (洲), when this land first became a nation. After 2 its freedom (自由) from England, it has 13 states. Each of the states had a star on the American flag (旗子). As the nation 3 , new states were formed and there 4 new stars on the flag. 5 a long time, there were forty-eight states. In 1959 two 6 stars were added (加) to the flag, standing for (代表) the new states of Alaska and Hawaii. ‎ ‎ 7 were the first people of the land and great number of people came from England. It is 8 that reason that the language of the U.S. is English and 9 its culture and customs (文化习惯) are more 10 those of England than any other country in the world. ‎ ‎　　1. A. America B. America’s C. American D. Americans ‎ ‎　　2. A. win B. won C. winning D. have won ‎ ‎　　3. A. grew B. grows C. growing D. have grown ‎ ‎　　4. A. are B. were C. have been D. had been ‎ ‎　　5. A. In B. From C. For D. Through ‎ ‎　　6. A. another B. many C. other D. more ‎ ‎　　7. A. India B. Indian C. Indias D. Indians ‎ ‎　　8. A. on B. for C. because D. because of ‎ ‎　　9. A. that B. why C. many D. all ‎ ‎　　10. A. as B. like C. same D. as if ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文告诉我们美利坚合众国的由来：美国是由州组成的国家，并且每增加一个州，就在旗子上增加一颗星。结合世界历史知识，完成此篇短文。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。此处American，又称亚美尼亚洲。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。介词后面跟动名词。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。用过去时和后面时态一致。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。与前面分句并列，故用过去时。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。引导一段时间用for。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。more用在数词和名词中间表示“又、再”。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。这里指印第安人。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。这是强调句。for that reason意思是“由于这个原因”。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。与前面的that并列，不可省略。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。be more like意思为“更像……一样。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇85‎ A rich American went to Paris and bought a picture painted by a French artist. The American thought the picture to be very fine because he __1 a lot of money for it. When he came to his hotel he wanted to hang the 2 up on the wall. He 3 it for a long time, but couldn’t __4_ which was the top and which was the bottom(底部) .The American __5 the picture this way and 6 , but still couldn’t 7 . ‎ So he had 8 . He 9 the picture in the dining room and invited the painter of the picture to 10 . When the painter came, the American said 11 to him about the picture. 12 they went into the dining room to have dinner. He looked 13 at the picture several times. Then he put on his 14 and looked at the picture again and again. At last he 15 that the picture was up side down. ‎ ‎　　1. A. cost B. spent C. paid D. took ‎ ‎　　2. A. map B. cap C. picture D. kite ‎ ‎　　3. A. looked after B. looked at ‎ ‎　　C. looked for D. looked up ‎ ‎　　4. A. tell B. say C. talk D. speak ‎ ‎　　5. A. painted B. turned C. used D. wrote ‎ ‎　　6. A. that B. it C. one D. another ‎ ‎　　7. A. see B. read C. decide D. look ‎ ‎　　8. A. a way B. a pen C. a road D. an idea ‎ ‎　　9. A. put B. hung C. stopped D. lent ‎ ‎　　10. A. tea B. rice C. bread D. dinner ‎ ‎　　11. A. nothing B. something C. hello D. sorry ‎ ‎　　12. A. At first B. At last C. At once D. at all ‎ ‎　　13. A. heavily B. loudly C. straight D. carefully ‎ ‎　　14. A. glasses B. coat C. trousers D. hat ‎ ‎　　15. A. watched B. understood C. sat D. opened ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　一位美国人在巴黎买了幅画，回去挂上又怕上下颠倒，最后只好请来画家本人。全文通俗易懂，选词时要根据事情的发展过程。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。上文说：他认为这画很好。 推断下文：因为他买这画付了许多钱。句中的介词for是个重要提示。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。上文说：那美国人买了画。推断下文： 回到旅馆，当然要把画挂起来欣赏。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。意思说“他看了好长时间，还是分不清上下”。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。短文最后一句说：画被挂倒了。 推断此句：因此，那美国人辨别不出哪边是画的顶部， 哪边是画的底部。 ‎ ‎　　5. B。由于上下不分，所以那美国人就把画反复颠倒看。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。句中的this是个重要提示。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。尽管颠来倒去，还是不能断定上下。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。他最后想出了办法。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。他先在餐厅挂上画。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。接上文（他在餐厅中挂了那副画）可推断下文： 美国人邀请画家来进餐。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。美国人邀请画家的目的是：看画家本人有什么反应。 因此，对那副画他一言不发。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。首先他们进入餐厅吃晚饭。 下文中的短语 At last是个重要提示。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。look straight at 表示“盯着……看”。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。画家也被搞糊涂了，他戴上眼镜并将画看了又看。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。他终于明白了那画被挂到了。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇86‎ ‎ The United States, Great Britain took the war on Iraq(伊拉克) in late March, 2003. 1 over twenty days American soldiers were in Baghdad, the 2 of Iraq. They ended the government(政府) of Saddam. 3 Iraqis died in the war. Saddam is 4 . No one knows __5 he’s dead or alive. ‎ ‎ In some parts of the city there was no light because of the war. Some oil wells(井) were set on fire. Now the Iraqis need food, water and __6 . Many soldiers and people who were hurt in the war need hospital care. People also need 7 to find their family members. ‎ ‎ After the war, some Iraqis broke into Saddam’s palace, government buildings, and stores. They 8 many things from Iraqi Museums. Other Iraqis are angry that the U.S soldiers didn’t stop the robbers(抢劫者). So far there is 9 no government of Iraqis. ‎ ‎ The reason for American soldiers taking the war is that they are 10 weapons of mess destruction(大规模杀伤性武器). But by June6, they hadn’t found any at all. ‎ ‎　　1. A. In B. After C. By D. During ‎ ‎　　2. A. city B. town C. capital D. village ‎ ‎　　3. A. Thousand B. Thousand ‎ ‎　　C. Thousand of D. Thousands of ‎ ‎　　4. A. A. tired B. run C. gone D. forgotten ‎ ‎　　5. A. if B. when C. how D. that ‎ ‎　　6. A. spaceships B. flowers ‎ ‎　　C. people D. medicine ‎ ‎　　7. A. an idea B. a way C. a plane D. a bridge ‎ ‎　　8. A. bought B. borrowed C. stole D. brought ‎ ‎　　9. A. still B. ever C. yet D. already ‎ ‎　　10. A. looking at B. looking for ‎ ‎　　C. giving up D. putting down ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇新闻报道：美伊战争给伊拉克人民带来了灾难，他们缺水、食物等生活必须品；孩子们害怕死亡。短文是一幅难民们逃难场景，读后深恶痛绝英美联军，同情伊拉克人民。如了解时事，不难完成此文。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据事实报道，他们经过二十多天的战斗后才到达巴格达。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。巴格达是伊拉克的首都。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。thousands of 成千上万的，thousands 前不加具体的 数目，是个概数。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。战后，萨达姆不知去向，下落不明。所以选择gone。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。if引导宾语从句。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。下一句“许多在战争中受伤的士兵和人民需要医生、护士的护理”告诉我们需填medicine。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。人们需要的是找到亲人的办法，而不是主意。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。战后伊拉克混乱，联军潜进博物馆抢走偷走珍品。 ‎ ‎　　9. A。报道时政府还没成立。still表示“仍然，还”。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。联军侵占伊拉克的目的是寻找大规模的杀伤性武器。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇87‎ People on Hainan Island like scuba diving. But do you know what makes if possible for people 1 under water for a long time? It’s the scuba machine. They do you know 2 invented the machine? It was Jacquse Cousteau and 3 friend. ‎ ‎ Cousteau was a man 4 of new ideas. Ever 5 he was a child, he had been dreaming of diving deep to explore the wonderful world __6 the sea. Later with the scuba machine he invented, his 7__ came true. He took a lot of pictures and videos of many things 8__ people had never seen before. It 9 him eight years to make a TV show which he named “The Undersea World of Jacques Cousteau.” People were 10 when they saw so many beautiful things under water. ‎ ‎ Cousteau loved the coral reels and all the beautiful fish. However, when he returned some years later, he was 11 to see that the colourful coral reels were 12 and grey. He tried everything possible to help people know the 13 of saving the environment and 14__ them to take part in keeping our lakes, rivers, seas and oceans 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. to breathe B. breathing C. breathed D. breathe ‎ ‎　　2. A. that B. what C. which D. who ‎ ‎　　3. A. he B. his C. she D. her ‎ ‎　　4. A. think B. filled C. full D. short ‎ ‎　　5, A. until B. from C. since D. through ‎ ‎　　6. A. under B. above C. on D. over ‎ ‎　　7. A. dream B. idea C. thoughts D. plan ‎ ‎　　8. A. so B. who C. and D. that ‎ ‎　　9. A. spent B. paid C. took D. cost ‎ ‎　　10. A. surprising B. surprised C. frightened D. frightening ‎ ‎　　11. A. sad B. afraid C. happy D. interested ‎ ‎　　12. A. got B. better C. were D. dead ‎ ‎　　13. A. important B. time C. knowledge D. danger ‎ ‎　　14. A. stop B. let C. make D. encourage ‎ ‎　　15. A. well B. clean C. rough D. quiet ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　海南岛属于热带气候，潜水是受欢迎的体育运动，要能在水下长时潜水，必须要有水下呼吸机。那么它是谁发明的？结合所学课文和保护环境的重要性，不难完成短文。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A。makes 后的it是形式宾语，动词不定式 to breathe是真正宾语。 ‎ ‎　　2. D。who 引倒宾语从句。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。Jacquse Cousteau 是男的 。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。“充满了……”可表达成“full of”或“filled with”。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。本句的后半句的完成时决定了应该用since。 ‎ ‎　　6. A。海底世界表达为the world under the sea。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。前一句提到他一直梦想到海底深处观看奇妙的世界。故用 dream这个词。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。先行词that在定语从句中做主语。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。考查It takes sb. Some time to do sth 结构。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。考查形容词的主动性和被动性，此句是被动意义。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。从Cousteau以后所做的事可以看出海底受到污染，珊瑚礁死了。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。指珊瑚死了。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。告诉人们拯救环境的重要性。 ‎ ‎　　14 .D。鼓励某人做某事“ encourage sb to do sth”。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。keep sb/sth + adj使……处于……状态。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇88‎ ‎ Mr. North looks worried this week. He always 1 good habit. He gets up early in the 2 and does some exercises before breakfast. He thought himself 3 and didn’t often go to see a doctor. But last Friday morning, when he was walking near the garden. He suddenly fell to the __4__. There was nobody around him and a few minutes later he came back to 5 . He stood up and went back slowly. He thinks something is wrong with his 6 and sometimes it beats fast, sometimes slow now. He can’t fall 7 in the evening. And he often feels 8 when he’s at work. ‎ ‎ This morning Mr. North came to the 9 . He told the doctor what happened to him. The young doctor 10 him over carefully and then said,” I’m 11 to tell you, Mr. North. The terrible disease is 12__ you. You must give up coffee if you hope to live 13 .” ‎ ‎ “But I never drinks it” said Mr. North. ‎ ‎ “And 14 smoking.” ‎ ‎ “I don’t smoke at all.” ‎ ‎ “Mm! That’s bad! If you haven’t anything to give up, I’m afraid I can’t do 15 for you.” ‎ ‎　　1. A gives B. keeps C. hopes D. studies ‎ ‎　　2. A. morning B. night C. spring D. noon ‎ ‎　　3. A. weak B. good C. healthy D. clever ‎ ‎　　4. A. floor B. fire C. hill D. ground ‎ ‎　　5. A. life B. wish C. business D. music ‎ ‎　　6. A. head B. face C. heart D. nose ‎ ‎　　7. A. behind B. asleep C. over D. in ‎ ‎　　8. A. hungry B. alone C. dangerous D. tired ‎ ‎　　9. A. school B. hospital C. cinema D. park ‎ ‎　　10. A. heard B. called C. looked D. climbed ‎ ‎　　11. A. glad B. sure C. busy D. sorry ‎ ‎　　12. A. troublingB. meeting C. having D. waiting ‎ ‎　　13. A. long B. longer C. short D. shorter ‎ ‎　　14. A. enjoy B. begin C. stop D. forget ‎ ‎　　15. A. much B. little C. few D. a lot of ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是一篇讽刺小故事：劳斯先生有良好的生活习惯，突然有一天他摔倒了，他怀疑自己的心脏有毛病，医生武断的说这和他的嗜好有关，而劳斯又没有这些嗜好，最后医生只好对他说无能为力。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。保持良好的习惯 表达为“keep good habit”。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。早餐前起床，故用 “morning”。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。因为每天早起锻炼，所以他认为自己很健康。 ‎ ‎　　4. D 跌倒在地可表达成“fell to the ground”。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。 “come back to life ”是“苏醒过来”。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。后面一句讲“他有时心跳很快”由此推断“他认为自己心脏有问提”。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。fall asleep表示“睡着、入睡”。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。由于他一直怀疑心脏不好，夜里睡不好，所以工作时常常感到疲劳。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。下句是讲他去看医生。 ‎ ‎　　10 .C。look over表示“检查身体”。 ‎ ‎　　11. D。说到不好的事，故用 “I’m sorry”。 ‎ ‎　　12. A。trouble sb.意思是“麻烦某人、困扰某人”。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。想长寿，少喝咖啡。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。戒烟可表达为“stop smoking”或“give up smoking”。 ‎ ‎　　15. A。医生怀疑是吸烟和咖啡引起的，但他没有这些嗜好，所以他只好说他没办法。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇89‎ The United States is full of automobiles(机动车) .There are still many families without cars. But some families have two or 1 more. However, cars are used for 2 than pleasure. They are a 3 part of life. ‎ ‎ Cars are 4 for business. They are driven to offices and factories by workers who have no 5 way to get to their jobs. When salesmen are sent to 6 parts of the city, they have to drive in order to carry their products. Farmers have to drive into the city in order to get home. ‎ ‎ Sometimes small children must be driven to 7 . In some cities school buses are used only when children live more than a mile from the school. When the children are 8 young to walk that far, their mothers take 9 to drive them to school One 10 drives on Mondays, taking her children and the neighbours children as well. Another mother drives on Tuesdays, another on Wednesdays, and so on. This is called forming a car pool. Men also form car pools, with three or four men taking turns driving to the place 11 they work. ‎ ‎ More car pools should be formed in order to put 12 motorcars on the road and to use less 13 . Parking is a great problem, and so is the traffic in and around cities. 14 many cars are being driven,. Something will have to be done 15 the use of cars. ‎ ‎　　1. A. even B. much C. little D. such ‎ ‎　　2. A. better B. less C. more D. farther ‎ ‎　　3. A. great B. necessary C. proper D. possible ‎ ‎　　4. A. bought B. used C. produced D. sold ‎ ‎　　5. A. other B. long C. short D. easy ‎ ‎　　6. A. busy B. some C. many D. different ‎ ‎　　7. A. cities B. school C. park D. gardens ‎ ‎　　8. A. quite B. very C. too D. so ‎ ‎　　9. A. money B. time C. pride D. turns ‎ ‎　　10. A. mother B. child C. way D. car ‎ ‎　　11.A. where B. that C. while D. when ‎ ‎　　12. A. more B. fewer C. many D. less ‎ ‎　　13. A. time B. space C. energy D. oil ‎ ‎　　14. A. So B. Even C. Very D. Such ‎ ‎　　15. A. on B. for C. from D. about ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　美国发达的经济给美国人民生活带来了方便，轿车进入家家户户，但也给社会带来了负面影响：堵车、环境污染等。结合节约能源和增强环保意识这一社会话题，不难完成。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. A.。因为后面有一个比较级more, 比较级前面加上much, a little, even, still 等词用来较为准确说明比较时相差的程度。如果比较级more修饰可数名词复数，则 more前不可用much修饰.表示程度。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。用 more than pleasure 说明车子不只是用来享受，还有其他的用途。 ‎ ‎　　3. B。用来说明车子在人们的日常生活中必不可少。 ‎ ‎　　4. B。提到了cars的其它用途。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。have no other way意思是“没有其它的办法”。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。开车送货到市区其它地方。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。下文提到了孩子上学。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。too… to为固定结构，表示“太……而不能”。 ‎ ‎　　9. D。根据下文可知，母亲们轮流接送小孩，由此推断，take turns（依次、轮流）符合文意。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。下文有another mother 提示。 ‎ ‎　　11. A.。定语从句的引导词同时在从句中充当地点状语。 ‎ ‎　　12. B。路上行驶的车辆要更少，motorcar是可数名词，故用fewer。 ‎ ‎　　13. D。车辆使用率低，耗油就少， oil不可数，故用less修饰。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。交代前一句的原因：这么多的车辆行驶。many, much, few, little前用so修饰。 ‎ ‎　　15. D。关于…方面可用about或on。on通常表示“关于…专著等方面”。90‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇90‎ ‎ Mr. Yorkwell was blind when he was seven. He had seen many doctors but none of them could do 1 for him. He could never see the world 2 . Now he has a seeing-eye dog. A seeing-eye dog can help a blind man 3 along the streets. He is called a seeing-eye dog __4 he is the eye of a blind man. ‎ ‎ One day, the bus was full of people 5 Mr. Yorkwell 6 the bus with his seeing-eye dog. There were no seats for Mr. Yorkwell at all. He stood 7 so many people before a few bus-stops passed. Then , one man got up and 8 his seat and got off the bus. The dog took little __9 there. The dog began to push the people on each side with his __10 . He pushed and pushed until the people around moved away and there was enough place for 11 people. Mr. Yorkwell sat down and the dog got up on the seat 12 Mr. Yorkwell’s. He lay down and put his head on the blind man’s 13 . Soon he fell asleep. People around were not 14 with him and all 15 at this. ‎ ‎　　1. A. nothing B. anything C. everything D. things ‎ ‎　　2. A. again B. once C. always D. still ‎ ‎　　3. A. run B. jump C. play D. walk ‎ ‎　　4. A. why B. that C. because D. what ‎ ‎　　5. A. when B. while C. before D. since ‎ ‎　　6. A. got off B. got on C. stopped D. waited for ‎ ‎　　7. A. among B. between C. above D. after ‎ ‎　　8. A. took B. started C. lost D. left ‎ ‎　　9. A. house B. seat C. room D. place ‎ ‎　　10. A. teeth B. eat C. eye D. nose ‎ ‎　　11. A. one B. two C. many D. all ‎ ‎　　12. A. under B. above C. beside D. behind ‎ ‎　　13. A. head B. foot C. leg D. back ‎ ‎　　14. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. sorry ‎ ‎　　15. A. spoken B. smiled C. worried D. learned ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　狗是人类的朋友。狗领着盲人上车，车上无人给盲人让座。狗帮盲人找座位。在一片笑声中，我们想到了在资本主义国家，人情冷漠。 ‎ ‎　　短文围绕狗帮人这件事，拟人化的形容了狗，比较贴近我们的生活。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。不定代词做宾语，联系下文，故“nothing”。 ‎ ‎　　2. A。承上句。此句意为“不再能看到外面的世界”。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。help后面可跟复合宾语。 ‎ ‎　　4. C。用because 交代前一句的原因。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。用when 引导时间状语从句。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。get on the bus意思是“上车”。 ‎ ‎　　7. A。 “车上挤满了人，他只好站在人群中”，故用“Stood among so many people”。 ‎ ‎　　8. D。离开座位可表达成“leave one’s seat”。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。用little修饰不可数名词room。 ‎ ‎　　10 .D。因为狗喜欢用鼻子嗅，人都怕，这样狗就占到了地方。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。狗和主人各占一个位子，故选two。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。狗的位子就在主人的旁边。 ‎ ‎　　13. C。这里比喻狗就像小孩一样，睡觉时把头搁在主人的腿上。 ‎ ‎　　14. A。由于狗是给一个盲人占座位，乘客并不生气，更多的是惊讶，所以他们都笑了，故15选B。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇91‎ ‎ Miss Richards was a teacher at a school for boys and girls. She __1 chemistry and physics from the lowest to the highest classes in the __2 . Sometimes the new classes 3 rapidly, but sometimes they were very 4 , and then Miss Richards had to 5 things many times. ‎ One year, the first class had been studying chemistry for several __6_ when Miss Richards suddenly asked, "What is water? Who knows? 7__ up?" ‎ There was silence (沉默) for a few seconds, and Miss Richards felt sad (难过), but then one boy 8 his hand. ‎ ‎"Yes, Dick?" said Miss Richards encouragingly (鼓励地). He was not one of the brightest children in the class, so she was 9 that he could answer. ‎ ‎ "Water is a liquid which has no 10 until you wash your hands in it, Miss. Then it turns black," the boy replied with great confidence (信心). ‎ ‎　　1. A. teaches B. teaching C. taught D. teach ‎ ‎　　2. A. schooling B. school C. schools D. home ‎ ‎　　3. A. learned B. learning ‎ ‎　　C. had been learned D. were learned ‎ ‎　　4. A. slow B. being slow C. slowly D. slowest ‎ ‎　　5. A. repeated B. repeating C. do D. repeat ‎ ‎　　6. A. years B. minutes C. weeks D. seconds ‎ ‎　　7. A. Put B. Hands C. Get D. Look ‎ ‎　　8. A. lows B. ride C. raised D. put ‎ ‎　　9. A. sad B. glad C. angry D. hungry ‎ ‎　　10. A. colour B. colourful C. colourless D. with colour ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这是篇幽默小故事。一位老师在课堂上尽力启发学生、鼓励学生回答问题，但有时学生的回答却让老师和同学们目瞪口呆。阅读时要注意字里行间的隐含意思。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。与首句一致，用一般过去时。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。教物理和化学，当然在学校。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。接受知识快可用learn rapidly来表达。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。slow指接受知识慢。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。had to 后面跟动词原形。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。从时间长度来看用weeks。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。hands up 意思是“举手”。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。raise one’s hand= put up one’s hand。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。有前句推知，应用glad。 ‎ ‎　　10. A。用名词作宾语，故选colour。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇92‎ I walked along the sea for about an hour until I began to feel hungry. It was seven. By that time, I was not far from a favourite restaurant of mine, where I often went to eat two or three times a week. I knew the owner well. ‎ I went into the restaurant, which was already crowded, and ordered my meal. While I was waiting, I looked 1 to see if I knew anyone in the restaurant. Then I saw a man sitting at a corner table near the door keeping looking in my direction (方向), as if he knew me. I certainly didn’t know him, for I never forgot a 2 . The man had a newspaper __3 in front of him. But I could see that he was keeping an 4 on me. When the waiter brought my soup, the man was 5 puzzled (迷惑) by the familiar (熟悉) way that the waiter and I called each other. He became even more puzzled as 6 went on. He could see that I was well 7 in the restaurant. At last he got up and went into the kitchen. After a few minutes he came out again, 8 for his meal and left. ‎ When I had finished, I called the owner of the restaurant over and asked him 9 the man had wanted. The owner told me he was a detective（侦探）. “Really?” I was 10 . “He was certainly 11 in me. But why?” I asked. “He followed you here because he thought you were a man he was looking 12 ,” the owner said. “When he came into the kitchen, he showed me a 13 of the wanted man . He certainly looked like you! Of course, since we 14 you here, I told him that he had made a mistake.” It’s 15 I came to a restaurant where I am known, or I might have been arrested! ‎ ‎　　1. A. for B. at C. around D. like ‎ ‎　　2. A. name B. face C. person D. friend ‎ ‎　　3. A. open B. closed C. opened D. close ‎ ‎　　4. A. orange B. arm C .apple D. eye ‎ ‎　　5. A. badly B. fast C. quickly D. clearly ‎ ‎　　6. A. program B. story C. time D. news ‎ ‎　　7. A. taken B. made C. known D. brought ‎ ‎　　8. A. paid B. paying C. spent D. cost ‎ ‎　　9. A. that B. what C. when D. which ‎ ‎　　10. A. worried B. surprised C. surprising D. sad ‎ ‎　　11. A. interested B. interesting ‎ ‎　　C. worried D. sure ‎ ‎　　12. A. up B. like C. at D. for ‎ ‎　　13. A. book B. photo C. paper D. magazine ‎ ‎　　14. A. know B. see C. hear D. look at ‎ ‎　　15. A. bad B. good C. lucky D. best ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　一日在外散步，饥饿难忍，走进一家“我”常去的餐馆，用餐时发现被人盯梢，原来那人是侦探，“我”被误认为是他要跟踪的人。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1.C。look around 解释为“朝四周看”。 ‎ ‎　　2. B。交代前一句的原因。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。have后可跟形容词作宾语的补足语。open可以是动词，也可以作形容词。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。keep an eye on sb./sth. 是“瞧着……”的意思。 ‎ ‎　　5. D。那位先生对于我和服务员相互打招呼熟悉的方式 “明显”感到很迷惑，副词clearly修饰puzzled。 ‎ ‎　　6. C。as…went on表示时间的推离。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。be well known表示“人人都知道我”或“众所周知”。 ‎ ‎　　8. A.。动词pay 可以和for连用。 ‎ ‎　　9. B。前面的动词是 asked, 宾语从句的连词不可用that，根据 wanted（及物动词），选用 what。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。根据前面的 “Really?”，表示知道那位先生是侦探，故用surprised。 ‎ ‎　　11. A。表示人用某些表达感情动词的过去分词形式的形容词，介词in 与be interested搭配。 ‎ ‎　　12. D。句意表示选用意思是“寻找”的短语。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。根据后文，是 showed me a photo。 ‎ ‎　　14. A.。since 表示原因，由于服务员认识(know)作者，此句才提到服务员告诉侦探是他搞错了。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。作者感到庆幸的是，由于在餐馆里大家都认识他，才没有被误认为他是要找的人。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇93‎ ‎ These days it is found that school students hardly have any sports. Is it because they have no 1 in sports? It may not be true. They often say they have 2 more important things to do. ‎ ‎ What are these important things? Exams! They have to 3__ themselves ready for all kinds of exams and tests in school. So many of them almost 4 bookworms(书呆子). In the past in the summer holidays, they could do 5 they liked, but now they have to 6__ all their time preparing. So 7 have kept them away from going in for sports. ‎ ‎ Because of the pressure(压力) from 8 parents and teachers, they 9 to work harder and spend most of their time 10__ books. As for the students themselves, they don’t want to 11 the lessons because they want to further their studies. So it is necessary to give __12 of their spare time to their studies and 13 up their school sports. ‎ It’s true a good education cannot go without physical training, the __14 _ is true, a quick mind hardly goes along with a 15 body. Without a strong body, you can never do anything well, how can you make great success in life? ‎ ‎　　1. A. interests B. interested C. interesting D. interest ‎ ‎　　2. A. another B. other C. much D. some ‎ ‎　　3. A. make B. have C. get D. let ‎ ‎　　4. A. turn B. grow C. look D. become ‎ ‎　　5. A. anything B. something C. everything D. nothing ‎ ‎　　6. A. give B. spend C. take D. cost ‎ ‎　　7. A. teachers B. parents C. studies D. holidays ‎ ‎　　8. A. his B. one’s C. their D. other’s ‎ ‎　　9. A. try B. hope C. have D. enjoy ‎ ‎　　10. A. in B. at C. to D. on ‎ ‎　　11. A. miss B. lose C. leave D. fail ‎ ‎　　12. A. few B. any C. all D. none ‎ ‎　　13. A. give B. take C. put D. send ‎ ‎　　14. A. thing B. same C. word D. kind ‎ ‎　　15. A. strong B. heavy C. weak D. ill ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇短文反映了当今教育弊端：学校、家长给学生加班加点，孩子们缺少睡眠、缺少体育锻炼，影响身心健康。结合实际，能顺利完成短文。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. D。空格前的no表示后跟名词， interest表示“兴趣”为不可数名词，have no interest in 表示“对……不感兴趣”。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。比较级前可用much， 表示比较的程度。 ‎ ‎　　3. C。与后面的 ready for 搭配的动词是get。 ‎ ‎　　4. D。四个选项的动词除了look（看起来）外，都表示变化， turn常用于颜色，后跟形容词； grow常用于状态，后跟形容词；只有become后可跟名词。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。与现在的死啃书本相对而言，过去学生可做everything they liked。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。与后面动词 preparing 搭配的动词是spend，牢记 spend…doing sth.句型。 ‎ ‎　　7. C。使学生不能从事运动的是studies。 ‎ ‎　　8. C。此处所指学生们的家长和老师，用复数的物主代词。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。学生处在各种压力之下，表示客观逼迫用 “have to”。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。在……上花时间可表达为“spend…on sth.” 。 ‎ ‎　　11. D。根据空格后的 “because they want to further their studies”，说明学生不愿意学习不及格。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。上文表示学生要将全部时间用于学习。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。句意和空格后的 up搭配，选用 “give”，是放弃的意思。 ‎ ‎　　14. B。与上句相对应，意思一致。 ‎ ‎　　15. C。句意表示“同样如此，身体虚弱就不会思维敏捷”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇94‎ A lady once wrote a long story. She sent it to a famous editor. After __1__ weeks the editor __2__ the story to her. The lady was __3__. She worte back to the editor: ‎ ‎“Dear Sir, ‎ Yesterday you sent back a story of mine. __4__ do you know that the story is not good? You did not read it. __5__ I sent you the story, I pasted together pages 18, 19 and 20. This was a __6__ to see whether you would read the story. When the story came back yesterday, the pages were __7__ pasted together. Is this the __8__ you read all the stories that are sent to you?” ‎ The editor wrote back: ‎ ‎“Dear Madam, ‎ ‎__9__ breakfast when I have an egg, I __10__ eat the whole egg in order to discover that it is bad.” ‎ ‎　　1. A. few B. a few C. little D. a little ‎ ‎　　2. A. gave B. came back C. handed D. returned ‎ ‎　　3. A. angry B. happy C. satisfied D. glad ‎ ‎　　4. A. How B. Why C. What D. Where ‎ ‎　　5. A. After B. Until C. Before D. Since ‎ ‎　　6. A. lesson B. test C. question D. thing ‎ ‎　　7. A. already B. still C. even D. yet ‎ ‎　　8. A. work B. check C. road D. way ‎ ‎　　9. A. On B. On the C. At D. At the ‎ ‎　　10.A. must not B. have not to C. need not to D. don’t have to ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　一女士在投稿时为了弄清楚编辑有没有看自己的稿件，故意将其中三页粘在一起。稿件被退回时，那三页依然粘在一起。该女士生气的质问编辑时，对方以一个巧妙的比喻作出了答复。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　Ｂ。根据文意，这里应选择一个词或词组，修饰可数名词，表示“一些”，比较四个选项，只有a few合符条件，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　Ｄ。把某物还给某人，可用give sth back to sb或return sth to sb来表达，细看句子，只有Ｄ项正确。 ‎ ‎　　Ａ。根据上下文可知，这个女士在稿件被退还时，看到那三页依然粘在一起，应当感到非常恼火，故选angry。 ‎ ‎　　A。分析句子，这里应选择一个疑问副词，在句中作方式状语，表达“你怎么知道这篇故事不好？”之意，比较四个选项，应选How。 ‎ ‎　　C。比较主从句中两个动作的先后关系，可知从句应用before引导。 ‎ ‎　　B。比较四个词，lesson意为“功课，教训”；test意为“检测，测试”；question意为“问题”；thing意为“事情，东西”。根据句意，应选B。 ‎ ‎　　B。句意为“当稿件被退回时，那几页依然粘在一起”，只有still合乎句意，为正确选项。 ‎ ‎　　D。比较四个选项，只有way可用来表示“方式，方法”。 ‎ ‎　　C。at breakfast为固定结构，意为“在吃早饭”。 ‎ ‎　　D。don’t have to do sth = needn’t do sth 意为“不必干某事”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇95‎ Joe wanted a computer. He asked his 1 for the money and they said he must get it himself. But how did he get it? He 2 about this when he walked home. Not many people wanted to ask children to work for them. Maybe he could take away snow for the neighbors (邻居). But this was not 3 . He had to wait a long time for that. He couldn’t cut grass for their gardens 4 he had no tools (工具) to do the work with. ‎ ‎ Then he saw one of his classmates, Dick, delivering (送) 5 . I could do that, he thought. Maybe I could even get the computer 6 away. I could pay 7 it a little each week. He ran to 8 up with Dick. Joe asked him a lot of questions. He learned that it was 9 to get twenty-five dollars each week. He learned that the job (工作) took 10 three hours each night. Dick 11 him the phone number of the newspaper manager (经理). ‎ ‎ Joe almost flew home. After he had told his mother 12 he thought, she 13 .“I think it is a 14 idea,” she said, “I’ll call the newspaper….” ‎ ‎ “Wait, Mum,” Joe said, “I’ll call. After that, I’m going to be a businessman now.” ‎ ‎ Joe’s mother smiled 15 . ‎ ‎　　1. A. teachers B. parents C. classmates D. friends ‎ ‎　　2. A. said B. told C. thought D. spoke ‎ ‎　　3. A. spring B. summer C. autumn D. winter ‎ ‎　　4. A. because B. when C. while D. after ‎ ‎　　5. A. newspaper B. bikes C. computers D. tools ‎ ‎　　6. A. now B. right C. just D. only ‎ ‎　　7. A. on B. to C. of D. for ‎ ‎　　8. A. take B. catch C. carry D. get ‎ ‎　　9. A. friendly B. kind C. possible D. wrong ‎ ‎　　10. A. at B. about C. before D. after ‎ ‎　　11. A. taught B. gave C. made D. asked ‎ ‎　　12. A. that B. when C. what D. where ‎ ‎　　13. A. smiled B. shouted C. cried D. worried ‎ ‎　　14. A. big B. large C. great D. bad ‎ ‎　　15. A. sadly B. happily C. politely D. angrily ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　这篇记叙文讲述了一个母亲巧妙引导孩子依靠自身努力达成目标的故事。Joe向父母要钱买电脑，在父母没有同意并且要求他自己想办法的情况下，他绞尽脑汁，终于想出送报纸挣钱的方法。阅读这篇文章要注意体会Joe的父母教育孩子的这种做法的真正目的，把握上下文提供的信息和词义的差异是解题的关键所在。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. B。根据文章可知，Joe是向他的父母要钱买电脑。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。他在路上边走边想这个问题，。think about sth.是固定搭配，意思是“考虑……”。 ‎ ‎　　3. D。由文意可知：要过很长时间（a long time）以后才能为邻居扫雪挣钱，所以可以推断此时不是冬天（winter）。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。没有工具是他不能为邻居割草的原因，这里为因果关系，所以选because。 ‎ ‎　　5. A。第14题后内容有提示。 ‎ ‎　　6. B。right away意为“立刻，立即”。Joe认为他甚至可以通过每周分期付款的方式“立刻”得到电脑。 ‎ ‎　　7. D。pay for sth. 为固定词组，意为“付……款”。 ‎ ‎　　8. B。catch up with 为固定词组，意为“追上，赶上”。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。it was possible to do sth. 意为“做……是有可能的”。 ‎ ‎　　10. B。每晚“大约”花费三小时，用about。 ‎ ‎　　11. B。因为Dick已经送报纸了，他熟悉报社经理的电话号码，所以他把电话号码“给”了Joe，故选gave。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。这里应选一个连接代词引导宾语从句，同时在从句中作宾语，故选择what。 ‎ ‎　　13. A。根据下文妈妈的言谈可见她很满意，故选择smiled。 ‎ ‎　　14. C。母亲肯定了这是一个好主意，说明这是一个great idea。 ‎ ‎　　15. B。母亲在听到Joe要自己打电话后，非常满意，“开心地”笑了，故选happily。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇96‎ Have you ever asked yourself why children go to school? You will probably __1__ they go to learn languages, geography, history, science and all __2__ subjects. That is quite __3__, but __4__ do they learn these things? ‎ We send our children to school to __5__ them for their future work and life. Nearly everything they study at school has some practical use __6__ their life, but is that the __7__ reason they go to school? ‎ There is __8__ in educatuon than just learning facts. We go to school above all __9__ how to learn, so that when we have left school we can go on learning. If a man really knows __10__, he will always be successful, because whenever he has to do __11__ he will quickly teach himself how to do it in the best way. The uneducated person, on the other __12__, is __13__ unable to do it, or does it badly, so the purpse of school is not just __14__ languages, geography, science, etc, but to teach pupils the __15__ to learn. ‎ ‎　　1. A. speak B. say C. talk D. tell ‎ ‎　　2. A. the B. other C. the other D. other the ‎ ‎　　3. A. true B. real C. fact D. wrong ‎ ‎　　4. A. how B. where C. why D. what ‎ ‎　　5. A. stop B. ask C. ready D. prepare ‎ ‎　　6. A. at B. in C. on D. with ‎ ‎　　7. A. best B. only C. just D. first ‎ ‎　　8. A. many B. much C. more D. most ‎ ‎　　9. A. learn B. to learn C. learning D. learned ‎ ‎　　10.A. how to learn B. why to learn ‎ ‎　　C. how does he learn D. why does he learn ‎ ‎　　11.A. anything new B. something new ‎ ‎　　C. new anything D. new something ‎ ‎　　12.A. way B. word C. foot D. hand ‎ ‎　　13.A. both B. either C. neither D. not ‎ ‎　　14.A. learn B. to learn C. teach D. to teach ‎ ‎　　15.A. subjects B. reasons C. way D. knowledge ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文阐述了我们在学校不仅仅要学好各门功课，更重要的是要学会如何去学习。有了好的学习方法，我们在离开学校时才能去自学更多的知识，解决人生道路上的各个疑难。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．Ｂ。强调说话的内容只能用say。 ‎ ‎　　2．Ｃ。other subjects指“别的一些功课”，而the other subjects指“别的所有的功课”。根据文意，应选择后者。 ‎ ‎　　3．Ａ。很显然，上文提到的内容也是学习的目的之一，完全正确，故选择true。 ‎ ‎　　4．Ｃ。该句起引起下文的作用，而下文主要解释为什么要学习，故选择why。 ‎ ‎　　5．Ｄ。prepare sb for sth是固定搭配，意思是“使某人为某事作好准备”。 ‎ ‎　　6．Ｂ。in one’s life是一个常用短语，意思是“在某人的一生中”。 ‎ ‎　　7．Ｂ。上文提到在学校学习的目的之一是要多学知识，从下文可以得知这并不是唯一的目的，故选only。 ‎ ‎　　8．Ｃ。固定搭配more than (doing) sth意思是“不仅仅……”。 ‎ ‎　　9．Ｂ。这里应用动词不定式作目的状语，故选to learn。 ‎ ‎　　10．Ａ。宾语从句应用陈述句语序，故排除Ｃ、Ｄ两项。疑问词与不定式连用可代替从句在句中作宾语，根据句子意思，应选A。 ‎ ‎　　11．Ｂ。形容词修饰不定代词应后置，故排除Ｃ、Ｄ两项。根据句子意思，应选B。 ‎ ‎　　12．Ｄ。on the other hand是一个常用短语，意思是“在另一方面”。 ‎ ‎　　13．Ｂ。仔细分析句子，不难发现句中含有固定搭配either…or…意思是“要么……要么……”。 ‎ ‎　　14．Ｄ。这里应用动词不定式作目的状语，根据句子意思，应选D。 ‎ ‎　　15．Ｃ。该句强调了校方不仅仅要授予学生知识，还要教会学生学习的方法。故选way。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇98‎ Do you know how to study __1__ and make your study more effective ( 有效的)?　We all know that Chinese students usually study very hard for long　__2__, This is very good ,but it doesn’t__3__a lot ,for an effective student must have enough sleep ,enough food and enough rest and __4__. Every day you need to go out for a walk or visit some friends or some nice places. It’s good for your__5__. ‎ When you return __6__your studies, your mind will be refreshed(清醒)and you’ll learn more__7__study ‎ better. Psychologists (心理学家)　__8__ that learning takes place this way. Here take English learning __9__ an example. First you make a lot of progress and you feel happy. Then your language study seems __10__ the same. So you will think you’re learning __11_ and you may give up. This can last for days or even weeks, yet you __12__ give up, and at some point your language study will again take another big __13__. You’ll see that you really have been learning all along. If you get enough sleep, food, rest and exercise, studying, English can be very effective and __14_ . Don’t give up along the way. Learn __15__ you are sure to get a good result(结果). ‎ ‎　　1. A. well B. good C. better D. best ‎ ‎　　2. A. days B. time C. hours D. weeks ‎ ‎　　3. A. help B. give C. make D. take ‎ ‎　　4. A. exercise B. homework C. running D. clothes ‎ ‎　　5. A. health B. body C. study D. life ‎ ‎　　6. A. after B. for C. at D. to ‎ ‎　　7. A. yet B. and C. or D. but ‎ ‎　　8. A. have found B. have taught C. told D. said ‎ ‎　　9. A. with B. for C. as D. to ‎ ‎　　10. A. to have B. to make C. to take D. to stay ‎ ‎　　11. A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎ ‎　　12. A. mustn’t B. couldn’t C. needn’t D. may not ‎ ‎　　13. A. work B. jump C. walk D. result ‎ ‎　　14. A. hard B. common C. possible D. interesting ‎ ‎　　15. A. slowly B. fast C. quickly D. happily ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　本文以学语言为例告诉我们学习应当劳逸结合，循序渐进。而不应该急于求成，半途而废。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1. C。这是总领本文的一句话，就是如何能够学的更好。另外根据and后面的more effective可知这里应选与之并列的比较级better，而不是原级well。 ‎ ‎　　2. C。for a long time 表示很长一段时间，a不能省略。故只能选for long hours。 ‎ ‎　　3. A。help a lot 这里指学习时间长并不会对学习结果有很大的帮助，也就是并不起决定作用。 ‎ ‎　　4. A。对于一个学生来讲，不仅需要足够的睡眠、食物、休息， 还需要足够的身体锻炼。故选exercise。文章的倒数第二句有提示。 ‎ ‎　　5. C。上面两句话都是对学习有益的一些事情。 ‎ ‎　　6. D。“return to” 这里指返回到……， 也就是从上述的活动中返回到学习中。 ‎ ‎　　7. B。表示并列。 ‎ ‎　　8. A。首先根据从句是一般现在时可排除C、D两个选项，再根据文意，心理学家发现，可知选A。 ‎ ‎　　9. C。“take sth as an example” 为固定词组，意为“以……为例”。 ‎ ‎　　10. D。stay the same 表示“维持原样”， 也就是没有任何进步了。 ‎ ‎　　11. C。根据第10题， 因为学习停滞不前，所以你就会觉得没学到什么东西。故选nothing。 ‎ ‎　　12. C。mustn’t表示禁止，语气最为强烈。needn’t表示没必要。couldn’t和may not均表示猜测。 ‎ ‎　　13. B。take another big jump 表示有大的飞跃或进展。 ‎ ‎　　14. D。表示学习也会变得生动有趣。A。learn slowly意为“慢慢学”，也就是说不要急于求成，应循序渐进。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇99‎ ‎ There was once a millionaire who loved money than anything else in the world. He didn’t know ‎ exactly how much he had, so he took on a little girl to __1__ all his money for him. ‎ ‎ It __2__ the little girl six days to count all the money. When she told the millionaire that he had forty-two __3__ dollars, he was __4__ with joy and asked, “ How much __5__ do you want?” He thought that __6__ she was only a child, he could __7__ her into taking a very small amount of money. ‎ ‎ The girl said, “well, I worked for six days, so I think you __8__ pay me for six days. Give me two pennies for the first day. Each day after that, just give me the amount you give me the day before, multiplied by itself. ‎ ‎ The __9__ thought that in this __10__ he would only have to give her a __11__ dollars. What a __12__ little girl! So immediately, he __13__ his lawyer sign up the contract, fearing that she would change her __14__ . ‎ ‎ On the first day the millionaire paid her two pennies, and on the second day, two pennies times two pennies, or four pennies. ‎ ‎ Each day after that, he gave her __15__ number of pennies he had given her the day before, multiplied by itself. And by the sixth day, the foolish millionaire had to give the clever little girl all his money. ‎ ‎　　1. A. bring B. count C. send D. hide ‎ ‎　　2. A. had B. needed C. got D. took ‎ ‎　　3. A. million B. dozen C. thousand D. hundred ‎ ‎　　4. A. pride B. wild C. surprised D. moved ‎ ‎　　5. A. dollars B. number C. time D. pay ‎ ‎　　6. A. as if B. though C. if D. because ‎ ‎　　7. A. warn B. advise C. cheat D. set ‎ ‎　　8. A. could B. would C. should D. might ‎ ‎　　9. A. girl B. millionaire C. two D. people ‎ ‎　　10. A. measure B. way C. point D. means ‎ ‎　　11. A. few B. little C. less D. much ‎ ‎　　12. A. nice B. clever C. fine D. foolish ‎ ‎　　13. A. ordered B. asked C. had D. persuaded ‎ ‎　　14. A. mind B. heart C. word D. plan ‎ ‎　　15. A. good B. great C. a D. the ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　一个富翁雇了一个小女孩为他数钱，她用了六天才把钱数完。付工钱时，富翁想欺骗她，但聪明的小女孩用了一个简单的办法得到了富翁所有的钱。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．B。由于不知道自己到底有多少钱，所以找个人帮他“数”钱。 ‎ ‎　　D项意为“隐藏”。 ‎ ‎　　2．D。根据it takes sb. some time to do sth.结构判断答案用D。 ‎ ‎　　3．A。因为他是一个百万富翁。 ‎ ‎　　4．B。be wild with joy意为“欣喜若狂”，表示the man当时的心情。 ‎ ‎　　5．D。pay在此指“需要支付的钱”，也就是“工钱”。由于前面是how much，所以不能用dollars。 ‎ ‎　　6．D。从下文可知，此处表示原因。 ‎ ‎　　7．C。由the man 的心理及前面的only a child推知，此时想“欺骗”那个女孩。 ‎ ‎　　8．C。should表示“应该”。 ‎ ‎　　9．B。此处指“富翁”。 ‎ ‎　　10．B。in this way为固定短语。 ‎ ‎　　11．A。只有few可以修饰dollars。 ‎ ‎　　12．D。从下文中可以看出小女孩其实很聪明，但是富翁却以为她“愚蠢”。 ‎ ‎　　13．C。have sb. do sth.意为“让某人做某事”。其余三词后面的动词不定式都要加to。 ‎ ‎　　14．A。change one’s mind意为“改变主意”。 ‎ ‎　　15．D。the number of表示“……的数目”，而a number of表示“许多……”。‎ ‎2010年中考英语复习完形填空100篇100　‎ ‎ Mr. Robinson had to travel somewhere on business, and as he was in a hurry, he decided to go by __1__ . He liked sitting __2__ a window when he was flying, so he got onto the plane, he looked for a window seat. He __3__ all of them taken except one. There was a young man __4__ beside it, and Robinson was surprised that he had not taken the one by the window. Anyhow, he went towards it. ‎ ‎ When he __5__ it, however, he saw that there was a notice on it, written __6__ large letters, __7__ “This seat is kept for proper balance. Thank you.” Mr. Robinson had never seen such a notice before, but he thought the plane must be carrying something particularly heavy in its room __8__ made it necessary to have the passengers properly balance. So he walked on and found __9__ empty seat, not beside the window __10__ . ‎ ‎ Two or three other people __11__ to sit in the window seat next to the young man, but they also read the notice and went on. Then when the plane was nearly 12__ a very beautiful girl __13__ into the plane. The young man, who was watching the passengers coming in, 14__ took the notice __15__ the seat beside him, and by this means succeeded in having a pretty companion during the whole trip. ‎ ‎　　1. A. air B. water C. train D. bus ‎ ‎　　2. A. on B. nearly C. beside D. far from ‎ ‎　　3. A. wanted B. found C. thought D. hoped ‎ ‎　　4. A. seating B. seated C. seat D. sat ‎ ‎　　5. A. arrived B. sat on C. reached D. left ‎ ‎　　6. A. through B. by C. with D. in ‎ ‎　　7.A. said B. saying C. spoken D. speaking ‎ ‎　　8. A. and B. this C. who D. which ‎ ‎　　9. A. another B. other C. the other D. the only ‎ ‎　　10. A. to sit B. to be sat C. to sit on D. to be sat in ‎ ‎　　11. A. stuck B. tried C. managed D. refused ‎ ‎　　12. A. empty B. full C. up D. down ‎ ‎　　13. A. reached B. stepped C. entered D. left ‎ ‎　　14. A. quickly B. fast C. slowly D. soon ‎ ‎　　15. A. onto B. away C. off D. up ‎ ‎　　名师点评 ‎　　乘飞机时喜爱窗子旁边，但是临窗的座位上有一个警告，上面写着：此座留着是为了保持飞机平衡， 只好作罢。又有几个乘客看到空座走了过去，但看到纸条后都离开了。这时，上来一个年轻漂亮的女士，旁边的年轻人就把纸条拿掉了。阅读时注意体会文章的幽默感。 ‎ ‎　　答案简析 ‎　　1．A。因为下文叙述的是飞机上发生的事情。by air=by plane。 ‎ ‎　　2．C。喜欢坐在窗子“旁边”。 ‎ ‎　　3．B。表示结果，与上句的look for（表动作）相呼应。 ‎ ‎　　4．B。从句子结构看，此空该填非谓语动词形式。seat是及物动词，意思是“使某人就坐”，它与a young man是动宾关系，所以用seated，表示状态；而sit是不及物动词，它与a young man是主谓关系，要用sitting，表示动作。 ‎ ‎　　5．C。不能选A，因为arrive为不及物动词；由下文可知，他根本没坐下来，所以也不能选B；若选D，则与上句的he went towards it相矛盾。 ‎ ‎　　6．D。in large letters是固定说法，意为“用大写字母”。 ‎ ‎　　7．B。这里该用现在分词表示伴随动作。say强调“说”的内容，而speak则指“说”‎ 的动作，故不选D。 ‎ ‎　　8．D。which引导定语从句，指代先行词something particularly heavy。 ‎ ‎　　9．A。another表泛指“另一个”。 ‎ ‎　　10．C。此处不定式to sit用作定语，应与被修饰的名词seat构成动宾关系，而sit却是不及物动词，必须加上介词on。 ‎ ‎　　11．B。try只表示设法去做某事，而不表示是否做成；manage却表示设法做成了某事。由本句末的but they also read the notice and went on得知，不选C。 ‎ ‎　　12．B。随着情节的发展，飞机上的人越来越多，快要“满了”，所以用full。 ‎ ‎　　13．B。enter作“进入”讲时，一般不与into连用，故不选C。 ‎ ‎　　14．A。quickly表示“立刻行动，毫不迟延”用于此处符合the man 的心境，也大大地增强了文章的幽默感。 ‎ ‎　　15．C。take ---off---是固定搭配，意为“把……从……取下”。‎ ‎　‎